← SSC archive
Paper archive

SSC CGL 2020 · 2021-08-18 · Shift 2

Archived paper and answer key. This is not a currently hosted official SSC key.

100 question cards · 1 paper · No sign-in needed
Question 1archived

Four letter-clusters have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the letter-cluster that is different.

  1. A
    NRJG
  2. B
    DHSP
  3. C
    FJQN
  4. D
    TXCZ
Show answer
A. NRJG

Pattern Analysis of Letter Clusters The question asks us to identify the letter cluster that is different from the others among the given options. To solve this, we first assign numerical positions to each letter of the alphabet (A=1, B=2, ..., Z=26). Then, we analyze the pattern of differences between consecutive letters within each cluster. Letter Position Mapping We map each letter to its corresponding position in the alphabet: A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5, F=6, G=7, H=8, I=9, J=10, K=11, L=12, M=13, N=14, O=15, P=16, Q=17, R=18, S=19, T=20, U=21, V=22, W=23, X=24, Y=25, Z=26. Calculating Differences Between Consecutive Letters Let's calculate the difference in alphabetical positions between consecutive letters for each cluster: Cluster Step 1: Letter 1 → Letter 2 Step 2: Letter 2 → Letter 3 Step 3: Letter 3 → Letter 4 NRJG $N_{14} \rightarrow R_{18} = +4$ $R_{18} \rightarrow J_{10} = -8$ $J_{10} \rightarrow G_{7} = -3$ DHSP $D_{4} \rightarrow H_{8} = +4$ $H_{8} \rightarrow S_{19} = +11$ $S_{19} \rightarrow P_{16} = -3$ FJQN $F_{6} \rightarrow J_{10} = +4$ $J_{10} \rightarrow Q_{17} = +7$ $Q_{17} \rightarrow N_{14} = -3$ TXCZ $T_{20} \rightarrow X_{24} = +4$ $X_{24} \rightarrow C_{3} = +5 \pmod{26}$ $C_{3} \rightarrow Z_{26} = +23$ Note: For TXCZ, the difference from X (24) to C (3) is calculated modulo 26. The shortest path is $X \rightarrow Y \rightarrow Z \rightarrow A \rightarrow B \rightarrow C$, which corresponds to a difference of +5. Identifying the Odd Letter Cluster By comparing the sequences of differences obtained: NRJG: (+4, -8, -3) DHSP: (+4, +11, -3) FJQN: (+4, +7, -3) TXCZ: (+4, +5, +23) We can observe a pattern related to the difference between the second and third letters in each cluster: In NRJG, the difference $R \rightarrow J$ is -8 (negative). In DHSP, the difference $H \rightarrow S$ is +11 (positive). In FJQN, the difference $J \rightarrow Q$ is +7 (positive). In TXCZ, the difference $X \rightarrow C$ is +5 (positive, considering wrap-around). The cluster NRJG is different because the step between the second and third letters results in a negative difference (-8), whereas the other clusters (DHSP, FJQN, TXCZ) exhibit a positive difference for this step. Conclusion Based on the analysis of the differences between consecutive letter positions, the letter cluster NRJG stands out as different from the rest due to the negative difference calculated between its second and third letters.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 2archived

Select the option in which the numbers are related in the same way as are the numbers of the following set. (18, 24, 144)

  1. A
    (26, 15, 130)
  2. B
    (22, 18, 246)
  3. C
    (16, 12, 109)
  4. D
    (18, 20, 137)
Show answer
A. (26, 15, 130)

Solving Number Set Analogy Problems Number set analogy questions require us to find the relationship or pattern between the numbers in a given set and then identify the option that follows the same relationship. Let's analyze the provided set: (18, 24, 144). Analyzing the Given Number Set (18, 24, 144) Let the three numbers in the set be A, B, and C. So, for the given set, A = 18, B = 24, and C = 144. We need to figure out how 18, 24, and 144 are related. Let's try some common arithmetic operations: Is C a direct sum or product of A and B? A + B = 18 + 24 = 42. This is not 144. A $\times$ B = 18 $\times$ 24. Let's calculate this: 18 $\times$ 24 --- 72 (18 $\times$ 4) 360 (18 $\times$ 20) --- 432 So, A $\times$ B = 432. The third number is 144. How can we get 144 from 432? We can divide 432 by something to get 144. $432 \div 144 = 3$. This means that 144 is equal to 432 divided by 3. Since $432 = A \times B$, the relationship appears to be: $$C = \frac{A \times B}{3}$$ Let's verify this rule with the given set: $$ \frac{18 \times 24}{3} = \frac{432}{3} = 144 $$ The rule $C = (A \times B) / 3$ holds true for the given set (18, 24, 144). Testing the Number Analogy Rule on Options Now, we will apply this rule $C = (A \times B) / 3$ to each of the given options to find the set that follows the same pattern. Option 1: (26, 15, 130) Here, A = 26, B = 15, C = 130. Let's check if $(A \times B) / 3$ equals C: $$ \frac{26 \times 15}{3} = \frac{390}{3} $$ Let's perform the division: $390 \div 3$ $3 \div 3 = 1$ $9 \div 3 = 3$ $0 \div 3 = 0$ Result: 130 So, $(26 \times 15) / 3 = 130$. This matches the third number in the set (130). Thus, Option 1 follows the same number relationship as the given set. Option 2: (22, 18, 246) Here, A = 22, B = 18, C = 246. Let's check if $(A \times B) / 3$ equals C: $$ \frac{22 \times 18}{3} = \frac{396}{3} $$ $$ 396 \div 3 = 132 $$ This does not match the third number in the set (246). Option 3: (16, 12, 109) Here, A = 16, B = 12, C = 109. Let's check if $(A \times B) / 3$ equals C: $$ \frac{16 \times 12}{3} = \frac{192}{3} $$ $$ 192 \div 3 = 64 $$ This does not match the third number in the set (109). Option 4: (18, 20, 137) Here, A = 18, B = 20, C = 137. Let's check if $(A \times B) / 3$ equals C: $$ \frac{18 \times 20}{3} = \frac{360}{3} $$ $$ 360 \div 3 = 120 $$ This does not match the third number in the set (137). Conclusion on Number Set Relationship Based on our analysis, only Option 1 (26, 15, 130) follows the same rule $C = (A \times B) / 3$ that was found in the given set (18, 24, 144). Revision Table: Number Set Analogy Set A B C Calculated $(A \times B) / 3$ Matches C? Given Set 18 24 144 $(18 \times 24) / 3 = 432 / 3 = 144$ Yes Option 1 26 15 130 $(26 \times 15) / 3 = 390 / 3 = 130$ Yes Option 2 22 18 246 $(22 \times 18) / 3 = 396 / 3 = 132$ No (132 $\neq$ 246) Option 3 16 12 109 $(16 \times 12) / 3 = 192 / 3 = 64$ No (64 $\neq$ 109) Option 4 18 20 137 $(18 \times 20) / 3 = 360 / 3 = 120$ No (120 $\neq$ 137) Additional Information on Number Set Patterns Number set analogy questions are common in logical reasoning and quantitative aptitude tests. They can involve various types of patterns, not just the product/division pattern seen here. Some other common types of relationships include: Arithmetic Progression: Numbers increase or decrease by a constant difference. Geometric Progression: Numbers are multiplied or divided by a constant ratio. Squares and Cubes: Numbers might be squares, cubes, or related to squares/cubes of other numbers in the set. Sum/Difference/Product of Digits: The relationship might involve operations on the individual digits of the numbers. Combined Operations: A mix of different arithmetic operations. For example, $C = A^2 + B$, or $C = (A+B) \times k$. Prime or Composite Numbers: The numbers might follow a pattern related to their prime or composite nature. To solve these problems effectively, it's helpful to try out different simple arithmetic operations and look for common mathematical relationships between the numbers.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 3archived

Select the number from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series. 6, 7, 23, 41, 125, ?

  1. A
    345
  2. B
    245
  3. C
    354
  4. D
    254
Show answer
B. 245

Analyzing the Number Series Pattern The given series is 6, 7, 23, 41, 125, ?. We need to identify the logical rule or pattern that connects the terms in this sequence to find the missing number. Let's examine the relationship between consecutive terms: From 6 to 7: 7 - 6 = 1 From 7 to 23: 23 - 7 = 16 From 23 to 41: 41 - 23 = 18 From 41 to 125: 125 - 41 = 84 The differences (1, 16, 18, 84) do not show a simple arithmetic or geometric progression. Let's look for a pattern involving multiplication and addition/subtraction relating a term to the previous term. Step 1: From 6 to 7 We can see that $6 \times 1 + 1 = 7$. Step 2: From 7 to 23 Let's try multiplying 7 by a small integer. $7 \times 3 = 21$. Adding 2 gives 21 + 2 = 23. So, $7 \times 3 + 2 = 23$. Step 3: From 23 to 41 Let's try multiplying 23 by a small integer. $23 \times 1 = 23$, need to add 18. $23 \times 2 = 46$. Subtracting 5 gives 46 - 5 = 41. So, $23 \times 2 - 5 = 41$. Step 4: From 41 to 125 Let's try multiplying 41. $41 \times 3 = 123$. Adding 2 gives 123 + 2 = 125. So, $41 \times 3 + 2 = 125$. Let's summarize the operations found: $6 \xrightarrow{\times 1 + 1} 7$ $7 \xrightarrow{\times 3 + 2} 23$ $23 \xrightarrow{\times 2 - 5} 41$ $41 \xrightarrow{\times 3 + 2} 125$ Looking at the sequence of operations: $(\times 1 + 1)$, $(\times 3 + 2)$, $(\times 2 - 5)$, $(\times 3 + 2)$. It appears the pattern might be a unique first step $(\times 1 + 1)$, followed by alternating operations: $(\times 3 + 2)$ and $(\times 2 - 5)$. Let's test this hypothesis for the next term (the missing number): The operations sequence is: Step 1, Step 2 (Op A), Step 3 (Op B), Step 4 (Op A). The next step, Step 5, should follow Operation B. Operation A: $\times 3 + 2$ Operation B: $\times 2 - 5$ Applying Operation B to the last known term (125): Next term $= 125 \times 2 - 5$ Calculation: $125 \times 2 = 250$ 250 - 5 = 245 So, the missing number in the series is 245. Revision Table: Series Pattern Summary Step From Term To Term Operation Calculation 1 6 7 $\times 1 + 1$ $6 \times 1 + 1 = 7$ 2 7 23 $\times 3 + 2$ (Op A) $7 \times 3 + 2 = 21 + 2 = 23$ 3 23 41 $\times 2 - 5$ (Op B) $23 \times 2 - 5 = 46 - 5 = 41$ 4 41 125 $\times 3 + 2$ (Op A) $41 \times 3 + 2 = 123 + 2 = 125$ 5 125 ? $\times 2 - 5$ (Op B) $125 \times 2 - 5 = 250 - 5 = 245$ Additional Information on Number Series Number series questions are common in logical reasoning and quantitative aptitude tests. They require you to identify a specific pattern that governs the sequence of numbers. These patterns can be based on various mathematical operations, including: Arithmetic progressions (constant difference) Geometric progressions (constant ratio) Differences of differences (second-order arithmetic series, etc.) Multiplication and addition/subtraction Squares, cubes, or other powers Alternating patterns (like the one seen here, or alternating operations, or alternating differences) Fibonacci sequence or similar recursive relations Combination of multiple patterns To solve number series problems, it's helpful to calculate the differences between terms, look for ratios, try simple arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division), and check for patterns involving powers or alternating rules. Sometimes, looking at the structure of the numbers themselves (e.g., prime numbers, perfect squares) can also reveal the pattern.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 4archived

Which two numbers should be interchanged to make the given equation correct? 78 ÷ 48 × 8 + (26 × 7) – 39 + (45 + 15) = 210

  1. A
    26 and 15
  2. B
    45 and 48
  3. C
    48 and 39
  4. D
    78 and 45
Show answer
C. 48 and 39

Understanding the Equation and the Problem The question asks us to find which pair of numbers, when swapped in the given equation, makes the equation mathematically correct. The original equation is: $$78 \div 48 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 39 + (45 + 15) = 210$$ To solve this, we need to test each given option. Each option suggests interchanging two numbers. We will substitute the numbers as suggested by each option and then evaluate the equation using the order of operations (BODMAS/PEMDAS) to see if the left side equals 210. Checking Option 1: Interchange 26 and 15 If we interchange 26 and 15, the equation becomes: $$78 \div 48 \times 8 + (15 \times 7) – 39 + (45 + 26)$$ Let's evaluate this expression: First, calculate the values inside the parentheses: $15 \times 7 = 105$ and $45 + 26 = 71$. The equation is now: $$78 \div 48 \times 8 + 105 – 39 + 71$$ Next, perform division and multiplication from left to right: $78 \div 48 = 1.625$. The equation is now: $$1.625 \times 8 + 105 – 39 + 71$$ Next, multiplication: $1.625 \times 8 = 13$. The equation is now: $$13 + 105 – 39 + 71$$ Finally, perform addition and subtraction from left to right: $$13 + 105 = 118$$ $$118 – 39 = 79$$ $$79 + 71 = 150$$ The result is 150, which is not equal to 210. So, interchanging 26 and 15 does not make the equation correct. Checking Option 2: Interchange 45 and 48 If we interchange 45 and 48, the equation becomes: $$78 \div 45 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 39 + (48 + 15)$$ Let's evaluate this expression: First, calculate the values inside the parentheses: $26 \times 7 = 182$ and $48 + 15 = 63$. The equation is now: $$78 \div 45 \times 8 + 182 – 39 + 63$$ Next, perform division and multiplication from left to right: $78 \div 45 \approx 1.733$. The equation is now: $$1.733 \times 8 + 182 – 39 + 63$$ Next, multiplication: $1.733 \times 8 \approx 13.864$. The equation is now: $$13.864 + 182 – 39 + 63$$ Finally, perform addition and subtraction from left to right: $$13.864 + 182 = 195.864$$ $$195.864 – 39 = 156.864$$ $$156.864 + 63 = 219.864$$ The result is approximately 219.864, which is not equal to 210. So, interchanging 45 and 48 does not make the equation correct. Checking Option 3: Interchange 48 and 39 If we interchange 48 and 39, the equation becomes: $$78 \div 39 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 48 + (45 + 15)$$ Let's evaluate this expression: First, calculate the values inside the parentheses: $26 \times 7 = 182$ and $45 + 15 = 60$. The equation is now: $$78 \div 39 \times 8 + 182 – 48 + 60$$ Next, perform division and multiplication from left to right: $78 \div 39 = 2$. The equation is now: $$2 \times 8 + 182 – 48 + 60$$ Next, multiplication: $2 \times 8 = 16$. The equation is now: $$16 + 182 – 48 + 60$$ Finally, perform addition and subtraction from left to right: $$16 + 182 = 198$$ $$198 – 48 = 150$$ $$150 + 60 = 210$$ The result is 210, which is equal to the right side of the equation. So, interchanging 48 and 39 makes the equation correct. Checking Option 4: Interchange 78 and 45 If we interchange 78 and 45, the equation becomes: $$45 \div 48 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 39 + (78 + 15)$$ Let's evaluate this expression: First, calculate the values inside the parentheses: $26 \times 7 = 182$ and $78 + 15 = 93$. The equation is now: $$45 \div 48 \times 8 + 182 – 39 + 93$$ Next, perform division and multiplication from left to right: $45 \div 48 = 0.9375$. The equation is now: $$0.9375 \times 8 + 182 – 39 + 93$$ Next, multiplication: $0.9375 \times 8 = 7.5$. The equation is now: $$7.5 + 182 – 39 + 93$$ Finally, perform addition and subtraction from left to right: $$7.5 + 182 = 189.5$$ $$189.5 – 39 = 150.5$$ $$150.5 + 93 = 243.5$$ The result is 243.5, which is not equal to 210. So, interchanging 78 and 45 does not make the equation correct. Conclusion: Finding the Correct Interchange After checking all options, we found that interchanging 48 and 39 results in a correct equation ($210 = 210$). Therefore, the numbers 48 and 39 should be interchanged. Revision Table: Checking Equation Interchanges Option Numbers Interchanged New Equation Calculated Value Correct? 1 26 and 15 $78 \div 48 \times 8 + (15 \times 7) – 39 + (45 + 26)$ 150 No 2 45 and 48 $78 \div 45 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 39 + (48 + 15)$ $\approx 219.864$ No 3 48 and 39 $78 \div 39 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 48 + (45 + 15)$ 210 Yes 4 78 and 45 $45 \div 48 \times 8 + (26 \times 7) – 39 + (78 + 15)$ 243.5 No Additional Information: Order of Operations (BODMAS/PEMDAS) When solving mathematical equations like this, it is essential to follow the correct order of operations. This ensures that everyone gets the same result for the same expression. The common mnemonics for the order of operations are BODMAS or PEMDAS. BODMAS: Brackets, Orders (powers and square roots), Division and Multiplication (from left to right), Addition and Subtraction (from left to right). PEMDAS: Parentheses, Exponents, Multiplication and Division (from left to right), Addition and Subtraction (from left to right). In the given equation, we first evaluated the expressions within the parentheses, then performed division and multiplication from left to right, and finally addition and subtraction from left to right.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 5archived

Read the given statements and conclusions carefully. Assuming that the information given in the statements is true, even if it appears to be at variance with commonly known facts, decide which of the given conclusions logically follow(s) from the statements. Statements: All dustbins are plastic items. No plastic item is stone. All woods are stones. Conclusions: I. No dustbin is wood. II. No plastic item is wood. III. Some woods may be dustbins.

  1. A
    All the conclusions follow
  2. B
    Only conclusion I follows
  3. C
    Only conclusion II follows
  4. D
    Only conclusions I and II follow
Show answer
D. Only conclusions I and II follow

Logical Reasoning Syllogism Solution This problem requires us to analyze logical statements and determine which conclusions can be validly drawn from them. This type of question is known as a syllogism. Understanding the Statements We are given three statements, which we must assume are true: Statement 1: All dustbins are plastic items. Statement 2: No plastic item is stone. Statement 3: All woods are stones. Let's represent these statements using basic set theory concepts for clarity: Statement 1 implies that the set of 'dustbins' is completely contained within the set of 'plastic items'. Statement 2 implies that the set of 'plastic items' and the set of 'stones' have no elements in common. They are mutually exclusive sets. Statement 3 implies that the set of 'woods' is completely contained within the set of 'stones'. From these statements, we can deduce relationships between the categories: Since all dustbins are plastic items (Statement 1) and no plastic item is stone (Statement 2), it logically follows that no dustbin can be a stone. Since all woods are stones (Statement 3) and no plastic item is stone (Statement 2), it logically follows that no plastic item can be wood. Analyzing the Conclusions Now, let's examine each conclusion based on the statements and our deductions. Conclusion I: No dustbin is wood. Let's trace the relationship: Statement 1: Dustbins → Plastic Items (All Dustbins are Plastic Items) Statement 2: Plastic Items \(\cap\) Stone = \(\emptyset\) (No Plastic Item is Stone) Combining 1 & 2: Dustbins must also be \(\cap\) Stone = \(\emptyset\) (No Dustbin is Stone) Statement 3: Woods → Stones (All Woods are Stones) Since No Dustbin is Stone, and All Woods are Stones, it means Dustbins and Woods belong to categories that are separate from each other (Dustbins are not Stones, Woods are Stones). Therefore, no dustbin can be wood. Conclusion I logically follows from the statements. Conclusion II: No plastic item is wood. Let's trace this relationship: Statement 2: Plastic Items \(\cap\) Stone = \(\emptyset\) (No Plastic Item is Stone) Statement 3: Woods → Stones (All Woods are Stones) Since All Woods are Stones, and No Plastic Item is Stone, there can be no overlap between Plastic Items and Woods. If plastic items were woods, they would have to be stones (because all woods are stones), but plastic items are not stones. This is a contradiction. Therefore, no plastic item is wood. Conclusion II logically follows from the statements. Conclusion III: Some woods may be dustbins. This conclusion suggests a possibility of overlap between Woods and Dustbins. From our analysis of Conclusion I, we established that No Dustbin is Stone. From Statement 3, we know that All Woods are Stones. For 'Some woods to be dustbins' to be possible, there would need to be an intersection between the set of Woods and the set of Dustbins. However, Dustbins are not Stones, and Woods are Stones. These two sets (Dustbins and Woods) are fundamentally separated by their relationship (or lack thereof) with Stones. Therefore, there is no possibility, not even a 'may be', for some woods to be dustbins. The sets 'Woods' and 'Dustbins' are mutually exclusive based on the given statements. Conclusion III does not follow from the statements; it is impossible according to the statements. Summary of Conclusion Analysis Based on our analysis: Conclusion I (No dustbin is wood) is valid. Conclusion II (No plastic item is wood) is valid. Conclusion III (Some woods may be dustbins) is invalid. Therefore, only conclusions I and II follow from the given statements. Conclusion Follows? Reasoning I. No dustbin is wood. Yes Dustbins are plastic items; Plastic items are not stones; Woods are stones. → Dustbins are not stones; Woods are stones. → No overlap between Dustbins and Woods. II. No plastic item is wood. Yes Plastic items are not stones; Woods are stones. → No overlap between Plastic Items and Woods. III. Some woods may be dustbins. No Dustbins are not stones; Woods are stones. → No overlap possible. Revision Table: Syllogism Basics Understanding the types of statements in syllogism is key. Statement Type Form Example Universal Affirmative All A are B All cats are mammals. Universal Negative No A is B No dog is a cat. Particular Affirmative Some A are B Some students are tall. Particular Negative Some A are not B Some students are not tall. Additional Information: Syllogism Rules and Deductions Syllogism is a form of logical argument that applies deductive reasoning to arrive at a conclusion based on two or more propositions that are asserted or assumed to be true. Common rules for determining validity involve the distribution of terms and the quality (affirmative/negative) and quantity (universal/particular) of the statements. For example: If both statements are particular, no universal conclusion can be drawn. If both statements are negative, no valid conclusion can be drawn. If one statement is negative, the conclusion must be negative. A term distributed in the conclusion must be distributed in the statements. The middle term (the term appearing in both statements but not the conclusion) must be distributed in at least one statement. In this specific problem, the statements 'All dustbins are plastic items' and 'No plastic item is stone' lead to the conclusion 'No dustbin is stone' because 'plastic item' is the middle term distributed in the negative statement. Similarly, 'No plastic item is stone' and 'All woods are stones' lead to 'No plastic item is wood' because 'stone' is the middle term distributed in the universal negative statement ('No plastic item is stone').

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 6archived

Select the correct mirror image of the given combination when the mirror is placed at MN as shown.

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
D. Option D (shown in image)

The correct mirror image of the given combination when the mirror is placed at MN is shown below:- Detailed Explanation:- The line MN is the mirror. The given number "4582169" ends with 9 . So the mirror image starts with ⇒ option 1 is eliminated. The given number "4582169" has the fourth number 2, so the mirror image should be ⇒ an option 3 is eliminated. The mirror image of the number 5, so the mirror image should be ⇒ an option 2 is eliminated. Hence, "option 4" is the correct answer.

Solution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 7archived

If ‘A # B’ means ‘A is the sister of B’ and ‘A @ B’ means ‘A is the mother of B’, then which of the following expressions means ‘C is the mother of F’?

  1. A
    C @ H # M # F
  2. B
    H @ C # M # F
  3. C
    C @ H # M @ F
  4. D
    F @ H # M # C
Show answer
A. C @ H # M # F

Finding the Expression for 'C is the Mother of F' in Blood Relations This question involves decoding relationships represented by symbols. We are given two specific relationships: A # B means A is the sister of B. A @ B means A is the mother of B. Our goal is to find which of the given expressions correctly represents the relationship C is the mother of F. Analyzing Each Expression Option Let's break down each option based on the given symbol definitions: Option 1: C @ H # M # F C @ H: C is the mother of H. (C is female) H # M: H is the sister of M. (H is female) M # F: M is the sister of F. (M is female) From these relationships, we can infer: C is the mother of H. H is the sister of M, and M is the sister of F. This means H, M, and F are siblings. Since C is the mother of H (who is a sibling of M and F), C must also be the mother of M and F. Thus, the expression C @ H # M # F means C is the mother of F. This matches the relationship we are looking for. Option 2: H @ C # M # F H @ C: H is the mother of C. (H is female) C # M: C is the sister of M. (C is female) M # F: M is the sister of F. (M is female) From these relationships, we can infer: H is the mother of C. C is the sister of M, and M is the sister of F. This means C, M, and F are siblings. Since H is the mother of C (who is a sibling of M and F), H must also be the mother of M and F. Thus, the expression H @ C # M # F means H is the mother of F, not C is the mother of F. Option 3: C @ H # M @ F C @ H: C is the mother of H. (C is female) H # M: H is the sister of M. (H is female) M @ F: M is the mother of F. (M is female) From these relationships, we can infer: C is the mother of H. H is the sister of M. So, H and M are siblings, and C is their mother. M is the mother of F. Thus, C is the mother of M, and M is the mother of F. This means C is the grandmother of F, not the mother. Option 4: F @ H # M # C F @ H: F is the mother of H. (F is female) H # M: H is the sister of M. (H is female) M # C: M is the sister of C. (M is female) From these relationships, we can infer: F is the mother of H. H is the sister of M, and M is the sister of C. This means H, M, and C are siblings. Since F is the mother of H (who is a sibling of M and C), F must also be the mother of M and C. Thus, the expression F @ H # M # C means F is the mother of C, not C is the mother of F. Conclusion Comparing the analysis of each option with the target relationship 'C is the mother of F', we find that only Option 1 matches this requirement. Expression Relationships Decoded Resulting Relationship (C to F) C @ H # M # F C is mother of H; H is sister of M; M is sister of F C is the mother of F H @ C # M # F H is mother of C; C is sister of M; M is sister of F H is the mother of F (C is sister of F) C @ H # M @ F C is mother of H; H is sister of M; M is mother of F C is the grandmother of F F @ H # M # C F is mother of H; H is sister of M; M is sister of C F is the mother of C Therefore, the expression that means 'C is the mother of F' is C @ H # M # F. Revision Table: Blood Relation Symbols Symbol Meaning Gender Implied (First Person) # is the sister of Female @ is the mother of Female Additional Information on Blood Relation Puzzles Blood relation problems often involve decoding symbolic representations of family relationships. To solve these, it's helpful to: Clearly understand the meaning of each symbol or code. Break down the given expression into individual relationships step-by-step, following the order of the symbols. Draw a family tree diagram if the relationships become complex, assigning genders where possible. Carefully trace the connection between the specific individuals mentioned in the question. Pay attention to the gender implications of each relationship (e.g., mother implies female, sister implies female, but sibling doesn't imply gender for the second person). Practicing different types of blood relation puzzles helps in quickly decoding the relationships and arriving at the correct answer.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 8archived

Select the figure from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series.

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
D. Option D (shown in image)

The logic followed here is:- 1) The bottom left side symbol will remove in all next steps. 2) The bottom left side symbol of the second figure is the water image of the top right side symbol of the first figure, the b ottom left side symbol of the third figure is the water image of top right side symbol of the second figure and so on. 3) New symbol added in top right corner in each next figure. Hence, "option 4" is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 9archived

In a certain code language, ‘NOSTALGIA’ is coded as ‘81’. How will ‘FRICTION’ be coded in that language?

  1. A
    64
  2. B
    105
  3. C
    85
  4. D
    36
Show answer
A. 64

Coding Language Pattern Analysis Let's analyze the pattern used in this coding language question. We are given that the word ‘NOSTALGIA’ is coded as ‘81’. Analyzing the Code for NOSTALGIA First, let's count the number of letters in the word ‘NOSTALGIA’: N O S T A L G I A There are a total of 9 letters in the word ‘NOSTALGIA’. The given code is 81. We can observe a relationship between the number of letters and the code: Number of letters = 9 Code = 81 It appears that the code is the square of the number of letters. Let's check this: \(9^2 = 9 \times 9 = 81\) This matches the given code for ‘NOSTALGIA’. So, the rule in this code language is likely: Code = (Number of letters in the word)2. Applying the Pattern to FRICTION Now we need to find the code for the word ‘FRICTION’ using the same pattern. Let's count the number of letters in ‘FRICTION’: F R I C T I O N There are a total of 8 letters in the word ‘FRICTION’. Using the pattern we identified, the code for ‘FRICTION’ will be the square of the number of letters: Number of letters = 8 Code = (Number of letters)2 Code = \(8^2\) Code = \(8 \times 8\) Code = 64 Conclusion Following the established pattern from ‘NOSTALGIA’, the code for ‘FRICTION’ is 64. Revision Table: Code Pattern Summary Word Number of Letters Calculated Code (Letters2) Given/Resulting Code NOSTALGIA 9 \(9^2 = 81\) 81 (Given) FRICTION 8 \(8^2 = 64\) 64 (Calculated) Additional Information: Letter and Word Coding Coding and decoding questions often involve finding a hidden pattern based on the letters or the word structure. Common patterns include: Positional Value: Using the alphabetical position of each letter (A=1, B=2, ... Z=26). The code could be the sum of positional values, difference, product, or other operations. Reverse Positional Value: Using reverse alphabetical position (A=26, B=25, ... Z=1). Opposite Letters: Pairing letters that are equidistant from the beginning and end of the alphabet (A with Z, B with Y, etc.). Number of Letters: As seen in this problem, the code might directly relate to the count of letters in the word, often involving squaring, cubing, or other mathematical operations on the count. Vowel/Consonant Count: The code could be based on the number of vowels or consonants. Rearrangement: Letters might be rearranged in a specific order (alphabetical, reverse alphabetical, swapping positions, etc.). To solve such problems, it's important to look for consistent relationships between the given word(s) and their codes. Testing simple hypotheses first, like counting letters or summing positional values, is often a good starting point.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 10archived

Select the option in which the words share the same relationship as that shared by the given pair of words. Mauritius: Port Louis

  1. A
    Zambia : Harare
  2. B
    Nigeria : Senegal
  3. C
    Kenya : Nairobi
  4. D
    Sudan : Tanzania
Show answer
C. Kenya : Nairobi

Understanding the Analogy Relationship The given analogy pair is Mauritius : Port Louis. To solve this, we first need to identify the relationship between the two words. Mauritius is a country, and Port Louis is its capital city. So, the relationship is Country : Capital. Our task is to find the option among the choices that shares the exact same relationship as Country : Capital. Analyzing the Option Relationships Let's examine each option: Option 1: Zambia : Harare Zambia is a country. Harare is the capital city of Zimbabwe, not Zambia. The capital of Zambia is Lusaka. So, this pair is not Country : Capital of that Country. Option 2: Nigeria : Senegal Nigeria is a country. Senegal is also a country. This pair represents a Country : Country relationship, which is different from the original pair's relationship. Option 3: Kenya : Nairobi Kenya is a country. Nairobi is the capital city of Kenya. This pair represents a Country : Capital of that Country relationship. This matches the relationship in the original pair (Mauritius : Port Louis). Option 4: Sudan : Tanzania Sudan is a country. Tanzania is also a country. This pair represents a Country : Country relationship, which is different from the original pair's relationship. Identifying the Matching Analogy Based on our analysis, only the pair Kenya : Nairobi exhibits the same Country : Capital relationship as Mauritius : Port Louis. Revision Table: Country Capitals Country Capital City Mauritius Port Louis Kenya Nairobi Zambia Lusaka Zimbabwe Harare Nigeria Abuja Senegal Dakar Sudan Khartoum Tanzania Dodoma (Official), Dar es Salaam (Former/Commercial) Additional Information: Types of Analogies Verbal analogies test your ability to see relationships between words. Besides the Country : Capital relationship seen here, other common types include: Part : Whole (e.g., Finger : Hand) Synonyms (e.g., Happy : Joyful) Antonyms (e.g., Hot : Cold) Cause : Effect (e.g., Rain : Flood) Worker : Tool (e.g., Carpenter : Hammer) Action : Object (e.g., Read : Book) Practicing identifying these different relationships is key to mastering analogy questions in competitive exams.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 11archived

In the following Venn diagram, the square stands for ‘Doctors’, the circle stands for ‘Blood donators’, and the pentagon stands for “Women. The given numbers represent the number of persons in that particular category. How many women doctors are blood donators?

Question figure
  1. A
    54
  2. B
    57
  3. C
    50
  4. D
    36
Show answer
C. 50

The Venn diagram is given below:- The shaded part represents women doctors are blood donators = 50. Hence, "option 3" is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 12archived

Select the combination of letters that when sequentially placed in the blanks of the given series will complete the series. K _ C T Q _ O C _ _ K O _ T _ K O _ T T

  1. A
    O, K, T, R, C, S, C
  2. B
    O, K, U, R, C, S, C
  3. C
    P, K, T, R, C, S, C
  4. D
    O, K, T, R, C, T, C
Show answer
A. O, K, T, R, C, S, C

Complete the Letter Series Pattern The question asks us to find the combination of letters that will complete the given series: K _ C T Q _ O C _ _ K O _ T _ K O _ T T. To solve this, we need to test the given options by sequentially placing the letters from an option into the blanks in the series. The correct option will reveal a discernible pattern in the completed series. Analyzing the Series and Options The original series has 7 blanks: K _ C T Q _ O C _ _ K O _ T _ K O _ T T Let's number the positions in the series (including blanks) for clarity: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 K _ C T Q _ O C _ _ K O _ T _ K O _ T T The blanks are at positions: 2, 6, 9, 10, 13, 15, and 18. We are given options with sequences of 7 letters. Let's test the letters from Option 1: O, K, T, R, C, S, C. We place these letters into the blanks: Blank 1 (Pos 2): O Blank 2 (Pos 6): K Blank 3 (Pos 9): T Blank 4 (Pos 10): R Blank 5 (Pos 13): C Blank 6 (Pos 15): S Blank 7 (Pos 18): C Substituting these letters into the original series, we get the complete series: K O C T Q K O C T R K O C T S K O C T T T Now let's examine this completed series to find the pattern. Identifying the Pattern in the Completed Series The completed series is: K O C T Q K O C T R K O C T S K O C T T T (Length 21). Let's look for repeating segments or logical sequences within this series. We can observe a recurring sequence: K O C T. The series starts with K O C T Q. The next part is K O C T R. Following that is K O C T S. The final part is K O C T T T. Let's break down the series into these segments: Segment 1: K O C T Q Segment 2: K O C T R Segment 3: K O C T S Segment 4: K O C T T T When we concatenate these segments (place them one after another), we get: K O C T Q + K O C T R + K O C T S + K O C T T T = K O C T Q K O C T R K O C T S K O C T T T. This perfectly matches the series we obtained by filling the blanks with the letters from Option 1. The pattern is therefore composed of four sequential blocks. The first three blocks follow the structure K O C T + (Incrementing Letter), where the incrementing letters are Q, R, and S. The final block is K O C T T T. This pattern is consistent and fills the original blanks correctly. We can confirm that Option 1 (O, K, T, R, C, S, C) is the correct combination of letters that completes the series according to this pattern. Let's verify the blank positions against this pattern structure: Position (1-21) Original Series Character Filled Series Character Corresponds to Segment 1 K K Segment 1 2 _ O Segment 1 (Blank 1) 3 C C Segment 1 4 T T Segment 1 5 Q Q Segment 1 6 _ K Segment 2 (Blank 2) 7 O O Segment 2 8 C C Segment 2 9 _ T Segment 2 (Blank 3) 10 _ R Segment 2 (Blank 4) 11 K K Segment 3 12 O O Segment 3 13 _ C Segment 3 (Blank 5) 14 T T Segment 3 15 _ S Segment 3 (Blank 6) 16 K K Segment 4 17 O O Segment 4 18 _ C Segment 4 (Blank 7) 19 T T Segment 4 20 T T Segment 4 21 T T Segment 4 The letters from the option (O, K, T, R, C, S, C) correctly fill the blanks at positions 2, 6, 9, 10, 13, 15, and 18, resulting in the series K O C T Q K O C T R K O C T S K O C T T T which follows the identified sequential block pattern. Conclusion The combination of letters O, K, T, R, C, S, C successfully completes the series by forming the pattern of sequential blocks: K O C T Q, K O C T R, K O C T S, K O C T T T. Revision Table: Key Concepts Concept Description Letter Series A sequence of letters that follows a specific pattern. Series Completion Finding the missing elements in a series based on its pattern. Pattern Recognition Identifying the rule or sequence that governs the arrangement of elements in a series. Sequential Pattern A pattern where elements or blocks follow each other in a predictable order. Additional Information: Types of Letter Series Patterns Letter series questions in competitive exams often feature various types of patterns. Understanding these can help in solving series completion problems. Alphabetical Order: Letters follow standard alphabetical sequence (A, B, C...). This can be forward or backward, or with skips (A, C, E...). Positional Value: The pattern is based on the position of letters in the alphabet (A=1, B=2, ... Z=26). Operations like addition, subtraction, or multiplication might be applied to these values. Repeating Pattern: A specific block of letters repeats throughout the series (e.g., ABC ABC ABC...). Alternating Pattern: Two or more different patterns are interleaved in the same series. Skipping Letters: Letters are skipped in a specific order (e.g., skip 1, skip 2, skip 3...). Combination of Patterns: More than one type of pattern might be combined in a single series. For example, one part of the series follows an alphabetical pattern, while another part follows a repeating pattern or a numerical logic based on positions. Sequential Blocks: As seen in this problem, the series can be formed by placing distinct blocks one after another, where each block might have a minor variation (like an incrementing letter) while a core part remains constant. Solving letter series problems requires careful observation, breaking down the series into smaller parts, and testing different possible rules or patterns.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 13archived

Select the option in which the numbers are related in the same way as are the numbers of the following set. (5, 11, 275)

  1. A
    (6, 18, 180)
  2. B
    (9, 15, 270)
  3. C
    (4, 16, 256)
  4. D
    (8, 14, 490)
Show answer
C. (4, 16, 256)

Analyzing the Number Relationship in (5, 11, 275) The problem asks us to find the option where the numbers have the same relationship as the numbers in the set (5, 11, 275). Let's examine the given set (5, 11, 275). We need to figure out how the third number (275) is related to the first two numbers (5 and 11). Let the numbers in the set be A, B, and C. So, for the given set, A=5, B=11, and C=275. Let's try to find a mathematical relationship between A, B, and C. Is C the sum of A and B? $5 + 11 = 16 \neq 275$. Is C the product of A and B? $5 \times 11 = 55 \neq 275$. Is C related to squares or cubes of A or B? $5^2 = 25$, $11^2 = 121$. $5^3 = 125$. $11^3 = 1331$. None seem directly related to 275. How about combining operations involving A and B to get C? Let's look at multiplication more closely. The product of the first two numbers is $5 \times 11 = 55$. How can we get 275 from 55 and the original numbers? We notice that $275 = 55 \times 5$. The number 5 is the first number (A) in the set. So, the relationship appears to be: The third number (C) is the product of the first number (A) and the second number (B), multiplied by the first number (A) again. Mathematically, this relationship can be written as: $C = (A \times B) \times A$, which simplifies to $C = A^2 \times B$. Let's verify this relationship with the given set (5, 11, 275): $A=5$, $B=11$, $C=275$. Using the formula $C = A^2 \times B$: $5^2 \times 11 = 25 \times 11 = 275$. This matches the third number in the given set. So, the identified pattern is likely correct. Applying the Number Relationship to the Options Now, we will test this rule ($C = A^2 \times B$) on each of the given options to see which one follows the same pattern. Option Set (A, B, C) Calculation: $A^2 \times B$ Expected C Actual C Matches? (6, 18, 180) $6^2 \times 18 = 36 \times 18$ 648 180 No (9, 15, 270) $9^2 \times 15 = 81 \times 15$ 1215 270 No (4, 16, 256) $4^2 \times 16 = 16 \times 16$ 256 256 Yes (8, 14, 490) $8^2 \times 14 = 64 \times 14$ 896 490 No Detailed Analysis of Options Let's examine each option carefully: Option 1: (6, 18, 180) Here, A=6, B=18, C=180. According to the rule $C = A^2 \times B$, the third number should be $6^2 \times 18 = 36 \times 18 = 648$. The actual third number is 180. This does not match. Option 2: (9, 15, 270) Here, A=9, B=15, C=270. According to the rule $C = A^2 \times B$, the third number should be $9^2 \times 15 = 81 \times 15 = 1215$. The actual third number is 270. This does not match. Option 3: (4, 16, 256) Here, A=4, B=16, C=256. According to the rule $C = A^2 \times B$, the third number should be $4^2 \times 16 = 16 \times 16 = 256$. The actual third number is 256. This matches the rule. Option 4: (8, 14, 490) Here, A=8, B=14, C=490. According to the rule $C = A^2 \times B$, the third number should be $8^2 \times 14 = 64 \times 14 = 896$. The actual third number is 490. This does not match. Based on the analysis, only option 3 follows the same relationship $C = A^2 \times B$ as the initial set (5, 11, 275). Conclusion The set (5, 11, 275) follows the relationship where the third number is the square of the first number multiplied by the second number ($C = A^2 \times B$). Option (4, 16, 256) also follows this relationship because $4^2 \times 16 = 16 \times 16 = 256$. Revision Table: Number Relationship Analysis Set First Number (A) Second Number (B) Third Number (C) Relationship Check ($A^2 \times B$) Result Given Set 5 11 275 $5^2 \times 11 = 25 \times 11 = 275$ Matches Option 1 6 18 180 $6^2 \times 18 = 36 \times 18 = 648$ No Match Option 2 9 15 270 $9^2 \times 15 = 81 \times 15 = 1215$ No Match Option 3 4 16 256 $4^2 \times 16 = 16 \times 16 = 256$ Matches Option 4 8 14 490 $8^2 \times 14 = 64 \times 14 = 896$ No Match Additional Information: Number Analogy Questions Number analogy questions test your ability to identify the relationship between a given set of numbers and then apply that relationship to other sets. These questions often involve basic arithmetic operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, squaring, cubing, or combinations of these operations. Tips for solving number analogy problems: Look for simple arithmetic relationships first (sum, difference, product, quotient). Consider squares, cubes, and their roots. Check for relationships between the first and second number, the second and third, or the first and third. Look for patterns involving sums or differences of numbers. Sometimes the relationship might involve multiplying or dividing by a constant number or one of the numbers in the set. Test your hypothesis with the given set before applying it to the options. Systematically check each option using the identified rule.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 14archived

Select the letter-cluster from among the given options that can replace the question mark (?) in the following series. NZK, MBH, LDE, KFB, ?

  1. A
    HIY
  2. B
    JHY
  3. C
    JHZ
  4. D
    JHX
Show answer
B. JHY

Solving Letter Cluster Series Questions This question asks us to identify the pattern in a series of letter clusters and find the next term. The given series is: NZK, MBH, LDE, KFB, ? Let's analyze the pattern for each letter position separately. Analyzing the First Letter Pattern Look at the first letter of each cluster: NZK → N MBH → M LDE → L KFB → K The sequence of the first letters is N, M, L, K. This is a simple backward alphabetical sequence. Each letter is one step before the previous letter in the alphabet. N is 1 step before M (N − 1) - Correction: M is 1 step before N (N → M is -1) M is 1 step before L (M − 1) L is 1 step before K (L − 1) So, the next first letter should be one step before K. K − 1 step in the alphabet is J. Analyzing the Second Letter Pattern Look at the second letter of each cluster: NZK → Z MBH → B LDE → D KFB → F The sequence of the second letters is Z, B, D, F. Let's find the steps between these letters, considering the alphabet wraps around from Z to A. From Z to B: Z → A → B. This is moving 2 steps forward in the alphabet ($+2$). From B to D: B → C → D. This is moving 2 steps forward in the alphabet ($+2$). From D to F: D → E → F. This is moving 2 steps forward in the alphabet ($+2$). The pattern for the second letter is adding 2 steps in the alphabetical sequence each time. So, the next second letter should be 2 steps after F. F → G → H. F $+2$ steps in the alphabet is H. Analyzing the Third Letter Pattern Look at the third letter of each cluster: NZK → K MBH → H LDE → E KFB → B The sequence of the third letters is K, H, E, B. Let's find the steps between these letters, moving backward. From K to H: K → J → I → H. This is moving 3 steps backward in the alphabet ($-3$). From H to E: H → G → F → E. This is moving 3 steps backward in the alphabet ($-3$). From E to B: E → D → C → B. This is moving 3 steps backward in the alphabet ($-3$). The pattern for the third letter is subtracting 3 steps in the alphabetical sequence each time. So, the next third letter should be 3 steps before B. Moving backward from B: B → A → Z → Y. B − 3 steps in the alphabet is Y. Combining the Patterns Based on our analysis: The next first letter is J. The next second letter is H. The next third letter is Y. Combining these letters, the next letter cluster in the series is JHY. Comparing with Options Let's check the given options: HIY JHY JHZ 4. JHX Our calculated next term, JHY, matches Option 2. Summary of the Pattern Position Pattern First Letter Subtract 1 (backward in alphabet) Second Letter Add 2 (forward in alphabet, wrapping around) Third Letter Subtract 3 (backward in alphabet, wrapping around) Applying this pattern to the last term KFB: First letter: K − 1 = J Second letter: F $+2$ = H Third letter: B − 3 = Y The resulting cluster is JHY. Revision Table: Letter Series Patterns Understanding different types of letter series patterns is key to solving these questions quickly. Here are some common patterns: Alphabetical Order: Letters moving forward (A, B, C...). Reverse Alphabetical Order: Letters moving backward (Z, Y, X...). Skipping Letters: Skipping a fixed number of letters (e.g., A, C, E - skipping 1 letter each time). Adding/Subtracting Positions: The position of the letter in the alphabet is changed by a fixed number (e.g., A is 1, C is 3; $3 = 1+2$). Patterns with increasing/decreasing steps: The number of skipped letters or the value added/subtracted changes in a pattern (e.g., +1, +2, +3...). Vowel/Consonant Patterns: The series might alternate between vowels and consonants or follow a specific vowel/consonant sequence. Combination Patterns: Different patterns applied to different positions within a cluster (like in this question). Wrapping Around: Patterns that treat the alphabet cyclically (after Z comes A, before A comes Z). Additional Information: Reasoning Skills Letter series questions are part of verbal or non-verbal reasoning sections in many exams. They test your ability to identify logical sequences and patterns. To improve your skills: Memorize the alphabetical positions of letters (A=1, B=2, ... Z=26). This helps in quickly calculating steps. Practice identifying different types of patterns, including arithmetic progressions in letter positions, alternate letter patterns, and patterns based on vowels/consonants. When dealing with letter clusters, always try analyzing each letter's position separately first. If a pattern isn't immediately obvious, try writing down the letter positions and look for numerical patterns. Be mindful of patterns that involve wrapping around the alphabet (A-Z).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 15archived

Select the option that is related to the fourth number in the same way as the first number is related to the second number and the fifth number is related to the sixth number. 83 : 3 :: ? : 5 :: 258 : 4

  1. A
    222
  2. B
    627
  3. C
    123
  4. D
    527
Show answer
B. 627

Understanding the Number Analogy Problem The question asks us to find a number that has the same relationship with 5 as 83 has with 3, and 258 has with 4. These types of questions test our logical reasoning and pattern recognition skills. We need to analyze the given pairs of numbers to identify the underlying rule or relationship. Analyzing the Given Analogies Let's examine the two complete analogies provided: First analogy: 83 : 3 Second analogy: 258 : 4 We need to find the relationship between the first number and the second number in each pair. Exploring Possible Relationships Let's try different mathematical operations or digit manipulations to see if a pattern emerges. Sum of digits: For 83, \(8+3=11\). For 258, \(2+5+8=15\). These sums do not relate directly to 3 or 4. Product of digits: For 83, \(8 \times 3=24\). For 258, \(2 \times 5 \times 8=80\). These products do not relate directly to 3 or 4. Direct arithmetic operations: Simple addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division between the two numbers in each pair doesn't yield an obvious consistent pattern (e.g., \(83-3=80\), \(258-4=254\)). Discovering the Pattern Let's consider division and remainders. Let's divide the first number by the second number in each given pair: For 83 : 3, \(83 \div 3\). Using division with remainder: \(83 = 3 \times 27 + 2\). The quotient is 27, and the remainder is 2. For 258 : 4, \(258 \div 4\). Using division with remainder: \(258 = 4 \times 64 + 2\). The quotient is 64, and the remainder is 2. We observe that in both cases, the remainder is 2. This might be part of the pattern. Let's look at the quotients: 27 and 64. Is there a relationship between the second number (3 and 4) and the quotient (27 and 64)? For the first pair (83 : 3), the second number is 3, and the quotient is 27. Notice that \(3^3 = 3 \times 3 \times 3 = 27\). For the second pair (258 : 4), the second number is 4, and the quotient is 64. Notice that \(4^3 = 4 \times 4 \times 4 = 64\). This reveals a consistent pattern! The relationship between the first number (N1) and the second number (N2) is: \[N1 = N2 \times (N2)^3 + 2\] This means the first number is equal to the second number multiplied by the cube of the second number, plus a remainder of 2. Applying the Pattern to Find the Missing Number We need to find the missing number in the analogy ? : 5. Let the missing number be X. Here, the second number (N2) is 5. Using the pattern we discovered: \[X = 5 \times (5)^3 + 2\] \[X = 5 \times (5 \times 5 \times 5) + 2\] \[X = 5 \times 125 + 2\] \[X = 625 + 2\] \[X = 627\] So, the missing number is 627. Verifying with Options Let's check if 627 is among the given options. 222 627 123 527 Our calculated missing number, 627, matches option 2. Summary of the Pattern Analogy First Number (N1) Second Number (N2) Calculation: \(N2 \times (N2)^3 + 2\) Result 83 : 3 83 3 \(3 \times 3^3 + 2 = 3 \times 27 + 2 = 81 + 2\) 83 258 : 4 258 4 \(4 \times 4^3 + 2 = 4 \times 64 + 2 = 256 + 2\) 258 ? : 5 X 5 \(5 \times 5^3 + 2 = 5 \times 125 + 2 = 625 + 2\) 627 The pattern holds true for the given pairs and leads to 627 for the third pair. Conclusion Based on the identified pattern, where the first number is equal to the second number multiplied by the cube of the second number plus 2, the missing number that relates to 5 is 627. Revision Table: Number Analogy Pattern Review the key concept used in this problem: Concept Description Application in this problem Number Analogy Finding a relationship between pairs of numbers to solve for a missing term. Used to find the relationship in (83, 3) and (258, 4). Pattern Recognition Identifying a consistent rule governing the relationships. Discovered the \(N1 = N2 \times (N2)^3 + 2\) pattern. Cube of a Number A number multiplied by itself three times (\(n^3\)). The quotient in the division pattern was the cube of the second number. Division with Remainder Expressing a number as a multiple of a divisor plus a remainder. Observed a consistent remainder of 2 in the given pairs. Additional Information: Solving Number Analogy Problems Number analogy questions require careful observation and systematic testing of possible relationships. Here are some common types of patterns to look for: Basic arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) between the numbers. Operations involving digits of the numbers (sum of digits, product of digits, difference of digits, reversing digits). Squares, cubes, or other powers of the numbers or their digits. Relationships involving sequences (arithmetic progression, geometric progression). Prime numbers, composite numbers, or other number properties. Combinations of the above patterns. It's often helpful to test simple patterns first before moving to more complex ones. In this problem, looking at division and then the resulting quotient helped reveal the cubic relationship.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 16archived

In a certain code language, ‘SURROUND’ is written as ‘RRUSDNUO’. How will ‘MITIGATE’ be written in that language?

  1. A
    TIMTEAG
  2. B
    ITIEMTAG
  3. C
    ITIMETAG
  4. D
    ITIMETGA
Show answer
C. ITIMETAG

Understanding the Code Language The problem provides an example of a word transformed into a coded word in a specific code language. We are given that ‘SURROUND’ is written as ‘RRUSDNUO’. Our task is to decipher the rule governing this transformation and apply it to the word ‘MITIGATE’ to find its coded form. Analyzing the Transformation of 'SURROUND' Let's look at the letters in 'SURROUND' and their corresponding letters in 'RRUSDNUO' based on their positions. Original Word: SURROUND S U R R O U N D Original Position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Coded Word: RRUSDNUO R R U S D N U O Coded Position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Comparing the letters and their positions, let's try to find a pattern. A common technique in such coding problems is rearranging letters, often by splitting the word into parts. Let's split the 8-letter word 'SURROUND' into four pairs: Pair 1: SU (positions 1, 2) Pair 2: RR (positions 3, 4) Pair 3: OU (positions 5, 6) Pair 4: ND (positions 7, 8) The coded word is RRUSDNUO. Let's split the coded word similarly: Coded Pair 1: RR (positions 1, 2) Coded Pair 2: US (positions 3, 4) Coded Pair 3: DN (positions 5, 6) Coded Pair 4: UO (positions 7, 8) Let's see how the original pairs relate to the coded pairs: Original Pair 1 (SU) seems related to Coded Pair 2 (US). Notice that 'US' is the reverse of 'SU'. Original Pair 2 (RR) seems related to Coded Pair 1 (RR). This pair is not reversed. Original Pair 3 (OU) seems related to Coded Pair 4 (UO). Notice that 'UO' is the reverse of 'OU'. Original Pair 4 (ND) seems related to Coded Pair 3 (DN). Notice that 'DN' is the reverse of 'ND'. This suggests a pattern involving swapping and reversing pairs: Split the 8-letter word into four pairs (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8). Swap the first two pairs (pairs 1 & 2). Swap the last two pairs (pairs 3 & 4). Reverse the letters within each of the four resulting pairs. Let's test this pattern on 'SURROUND': Original word: S U R R O U N D Pairs: (SU) (RR) (OU) (ND) Swap pairs 1&2 and 3&4: (RR) (SU) (ND) (OU) Reverse letters in each pair: (RR) (US) (DN) (UO) Combine: RRUSDNUO This matches the given coded word for 'SURROUND'. So, this is the correct pattern. Applying the Pattern to 'MITIGATE' Now, let's apply the same pattern to the word ‘MITIGATE’. The word is MITIGATE. Step 1: Split into four pairs: Pair 1: MI (positions 1, 2) Pair 2: TI (positions 3, 4) Pair 3: GA (positions 5, 6) Pair 4: TE (positions 7, 8) Step 2: Swap the first two pairs (MI & TI): (TI) (MI) (GA) (TE) Step 3: Swap the last two pairs (GA & TE): (TI) (MI) (TE) (GA) Step 4: Reverse the letters within each pair: Reverse TI → IT Reverse MI → IM Reverse TE → ET Reverse GA → AG The resulting pairs are (IT) (IM) (ET) (AG). Step 5: Combine the reversed pairs: ITIMETAG So, the coded word for ‘MITIGATE’ is ITIMETAG. Comparing with Options Let's check the given options: TIMTEAG ITIEMTAG ITIMETAG ITIMETGA Our derived coded word, ITIMETAG, matches Option 3. Conclusion By analyzing the transformation of 'SURROUND' to 'RRUSDNUO', we found a pattern involving splitting the word into pairs, swapping specific pairs, and reversing the letters within each pair. Applying this same pattern to 'MITIGATE' yields the coded word ITIMETAG. Revision Table: Code Language Pattern Step Description Example: SURROUND Example: MITIGATE 1 Split into 4 pairs (SU)(RR)(OU)(ND) (MI)(TI)(GA)(TE) 2 Swap 1st & 2nd pairs (RR)(SU)(OU)(ND) (TI)(MI)(GA)(TE) 3 Swap 3rd & 4th pairs (RR)(SU)(ND)(OU) (TI)(MI)(TE)(GA) 4 Reverse each pair (RR)(US)(DN)(UO) (IT)(IM)(ET)(AG) 5 Combine RRUSDNUO ITIMETAG Additional Information: Letter Coding Concepts Letter coding is a common type of question in logical reasoning sections of competitive exams. These questions test your ability to identify patterns and rules governing the transformation of words. Common patterns include: Positional Changes: Letters move to different positions based on a fixed rule (e.g., reverse order, fixed shift, split and rearrange). Letter Shifts: Each letter is shifted forward or backward in the alphabet by a fixed number (e.g., A becomes C, B becomes D - a shift of +2). Opposite Letters: Letters are replaced by their counterparts from the opposite end of the alphabet (e.g., A becomes Z, B becomes Y). Vowel/Consonant Changes: Different rules apply to vowels and consonants. Substitution: Each letter is replaced by a specific different letter or symbol. Combination of Rules: The code might involve multiple steps or a combination of the above patterns, as seen in this question which combines splitting, swapping, and reversing pairs. To solve these problems, carefully observe the given example, try breaking down the word and the code, and look for consistent rules based on position, letter value, or groups of letters. Applying the suspected rule to the target word helps confirm the pattern.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 17archived

Select the correct option that indicates the arrangement of the given words in the order in which they appear in an English dictionary. 1. Turban 2. Terminator 3. Twister 4. Temptation 5. Terrorism

  1. A
    4, 5, 2, 1, 3
  2. B
    4, 1, 3, 2, 5
  3. C
    4, 2, 5, 1, 3
  4. D
    4, 2, 1, 3, 5
Show answer
C. 4, 2, 5, 1, 3

Understanding Dictionary Order for Word Arrangement Arranging words in the order they appear in an English dictionary is also known as alphabetical order. This involves comparing words letter by letter from left to right. If the first letters are the same, you move to the second letter, and so on, until you find a difference. Step-by-Step Dictionary Arrangement of Words Let's take the given words and arrange them according to dictionary rules: Turban Terminator Twister Temptation Terrorism First, let's list the words and their corresponding numbers: Turban (1) Terminator (2) Twister (3) Temptation (4) Terrorism (5) Now, let's compare them letter by letter: Comparing First Letters All words begin with the letter 'T'. So, we move to the second letter. Comparing Second Letters Turban: Turban Terminator: Terminator Twister: Twister Temptation: Temptation Terrorism: Terrorism The second letters are 'u', 'e', 'w', 'e', 'e'. In alphabetical order, 'e' comes before 'u' and 'w'. The words starting with 'Te' are Terminator, Temptation, and Terrorism. The words starting with 'Tu' and 'Tw' will come later. Arranging Words Starting with 'Te' Let's compare Terminator (2), Temptation (4), and Terrorism (5). They all start with 'Te'. We look at the third letter: Terminator: Terminator Temptation: Temptation Terrorism: Terrorism The third letters are 'm', 'p', 'r'. In alphabetical order, 'm' comes before 'p', and 'p' comes before 'r'. So, the order among these three is: Temptation (Temptation) Terminator (Terminator) Terrorism (Terrorism) Wait, let's re-check the third letters: Terminator (r), Temptation (m), Terrorism (r). The third letters are 'r', 'm', 'r'. In alphabetical order, 'm' comes before 'r'. So, Temptation comes first among these three. Now compare Terminator and Terrorism, both starting with 'Ter'. Look at the fourth letter: Terminator: Terminator Terrorism: Terrorism The fourth letters are 'm' and 'r'. In alphabetical order, 'm' comes before 'r'. So, Terminator comes before Terrorism. Correct order for 'Te' words: Temptation (4) Terminator (2) Terrorism (5) Arranging Remaining Words The remaining words are Turban (1) and Twister (3). Let's compare them. They both start with 'T'. Look at the second letter: Turban: Turban Twister: Twister The second letters are 'u' and 'w'. In alphabetical order, 'u' comes before 'w'. So, Turban comes before Twister. Order for remaining words: Turban (1) Twister (3) Combining the Ordered Groups The words starting with 'Te' come before words starting with 'Tu' and 'Tw'. Combining the ordered groups, the final dictionary order is: Temptation (4) Terminator (2) Terrorism (5) Turban (1) Twister (3) The sequence of numbers is 4, 2, 5, 1, 3. Let's put this in a table for clarity: Original Number Word Comparison Steps Final Dictionary Order 4 Temptation Te > Tem ('m' is 3rd letter) > Temp ('p' is 4th letter) ... 1 2 Terminator Te > Ter ('r' is 3rd letter) > Term ('m' is 4th letter) ... 2 5 Terrorism Te > Ter ('r' is 3rd letter) > Terr ('r' is 4th letter) > Terro ('o' is 5th letter) ... 3 1 Turban Tu ('u' is 2nd letter) ... 4 3 Twister Tw ('w' is 2nd letter) ... 5 Comparing the words letter by letter until a difference is found gives us the order Temptation, Terminator, Terrorism, Turban, Twister. The corresponding sequence of numbers is 4, 2, 5, 1, 3. Revision Table: Key Dictionary Order Concepts Concept Description How it Applies Here Alphabetical Comparison Comparing words letter by letter from left to right. Used to compare T, Te, Ter, Tem, etc. Comparing Identical Prefixes If prefixes are the same, compare the next letter. Comparing 'Terminator' and 'Terrorism' after 'Ter'. Shorter Word with Same Prefix A shorter word with the same prefix as a longer word comes first (e.g., 'cat' comes before 'catalog'). This rule wasn't needed here as no word was a prefix of another. Not applicable in this specific problem. Additional Information: Importance of Alphabetical Order and Word Arrangement Alphabetical order is fundamental for organizing information efficiently. It's used in dictionaries, encyclopedias, indexes, library catalogs, phone books, and digital lists. Understanding how to arrange words alphabetically is a crucial skill for quickly finding information. Dictionaries: Words are listed alphabetically to help users easily locate definitions. Indexes: Topics or names are arranged alphabetically for quick reference. Filing Systems: Documents are often filed alphabetically by name or subject. Data Sorting: In computing and data management, sorting data alphabetically is a common task. Mastering dictionary order helps improve vocabulary skills and information retrieval efficiency.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 18archived

How many triangles are there in the given figure?

Question figure
  1. A
    15
  2. B
    13
  3. C
    12
  4. D
    14
Show answer
B. 13

The diagram is given below:- The total number of triangles is 13. Hence, "option 2" is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 19archived

What was the day of the week on 10 June 2011?

  1. A
    Saturday
  2. B
    Sunday
  3. C
    Monday
  4. D
    Friday
Show answer
D. Friday

Let's find the day of the week on 10 June 2011 by calculating the number of 'odd days'. Odd days are the extra days left after forming complete weeks from a given number of days. We typically use a reference point, and a common method is to calculate the total odd days from a known date (like the beginning of the Gregorian calendar) up to the required date. Understanding Odd Days for Calendar Calculations The concept of odd days is crucial for determining the day of the week. Here's how it works: A normal year has 365 days. $365 = 52 \times 7 + 1$. So, a normal year has 1 odd day. A leap year has 366 days. $366 = 52 \times 7 + 2$. So, a leap year has 2 odd days. The number of odd days in a certain number of days is the remainder when the total number of days is divided by 7. Calculating Odd Days Up to 2010 We need to find the total number of odd days up to the end of the year 2010. We can break this down into centuries and then the remaining years. Odd Days in Centuries: 100 years: 5 odd days 200 years: 3 odd days 300 years: 1 odd day 400 years: 0 odd days (since 400 is a leap century) This pattern of odd days (5, 3, 1, 0) repeats every 400 years. Odd Days up to 2000 years: $2000 = 5 \times 400$. Since 400 years have 0 odd days, 2000 years also have $5 \times 0 = 0$ odd days. Odd Days from 2001 to 2010: This period includes 10 full years. We need to count the number of leap years and ordinary years between 2001 and 2010. Leap years in this period are 2004 and 2008 (years divisible by 4). There are 2 leap years. Ordinary years are $10 - 2 = 8$ years. Total odd days in these 10 years = (Number of ordinary years $\times$ 1) + (Number of leap years $\times$ 2) Total odd days = $(8 \times 1) + (2 \times 2) = 8 + 4 = 12$ days. Odd days modulo 7 = $12 \pmod{7} = 5$ odd days. Total Odd Days up to 2010: Odd days (up to 2000) + Odd days (2001-2010) = $0 + 5 = 5$ odd days. Calculating Odd Days in 2011 up to 10 June Now, let's calculate the odd days from the beginning of 2011 up to 10 June 2011. Note that 2011 is not a leap year. January: 31 days $\equiv 31 \pmod{7} = 3$ odd days February: 28 days (2011 is not a leap year) $\equiv 28 \pmod{7} = 0$ odd days March: 31 days $\equiv 31 \pmod{7} = 3$ odd days April: 30 days $\equiv 30 \pmod{7} = 2$ odd days May: 31 days $\equiv 31 \pmod{7} = 3$ odd days June: 10 days $\equiv 10 \pmod{7} = 3$ odd days Total odd days in 2011 up to 10 June = $3 + 0 + 3 + 2 + 3 + 3 = 14$ odd days. Odd days modulo 7 = $14 \pmod{7} = 0$ odd days. Finding the Day of the Week We sum the total odd days calculated: Total odd days = (Odd days up to 2010) + (Odd days in 2011 up to June 10) Total odd days = $5 + 0 = 5$ odd days. We map the total number of odd days to the day of the week using the standard convention: Odd Days Day of the Week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Since the total number of odd days is 5, the day of the week on 10 June 2011 was Friday. Revision Table: Key Odd Day Values Period/Duration Odd Days 100 years 5 200 years 3 300 years 1 400 years 0 Ordinary Year (365 days) 1 Leap Year (366 days) 2 Number of days $\pmod{7}$ Remainder Additional Information: Leap Year Rules A year is a leap year if it is divisible by 4, unless it is a century year (divisible by 100). Century years are leap years only if they are also divisible by 400. Examples of leap years: 2000 (divisible by 400), 2004, 2008, 2012, 2016, etc. Examples of ordinary years: 2001, 2002, 2003, 2010, 2011, 1900 (century year, but not divisible by 400). Understanding leap years is essential for accurate odd day calculations over longer periods.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 20archived

Four number-pairs have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the number-pair that is different.

  1. A
    25 ∶ 631
  2. B
    30 ∶ 908
  3. C
    22 ∶ 490
  4. D
    21 ∶ 447
Show answer
B. 30 ∶ 908

Finding the Different Number Pair in Reasoning Problems This question asks us to identify the number pair that is different from the other three, meaning three pairs follow a similar rule or pattern, and one does not. These types of problems test our ability to find mathematical or logical relationships between numbers. We are given four number pairs: 25 ∶ 631 30 ∶ 908 22 ∶ 490 21 ∶ 447 Let's analyze the relationship between the first number and the second number in each pair. Often, in such reasoning questions, the relationship involves squaring, cubing, multiplication, addition, or subtraction of the first number. Let's try to find a pattern based on squaring the first number. Analyzing the Number Pairs We will examine each pair and see if there's a consistent mathematical operation linking the two numbers. Pair 1: 25 ∶ 631 Let's square the first number, 25: \(25^2 = 25 \times 25 = 625\) The second number is 631. The difference between 631 and 625 is: \(631 - 625 = 6\) So, the relationship could be \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Let's check if this pattern holds for other pairs. Pair 2: 30 ∶ 908 Let's apply the possible pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\) here. Square the first number, 30: \(30^2 = 30 \times 30 = 900\) Add 6 to this value: \(900 + 6 = 906\) The second number in this pair is 908. Since 906 is not equal to 908, this pair does not follow the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). This pair seems different. However, let's verify the pattern with the remaining pairs to be sure. Pair 3: 22 ∶ 490 Apply the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Square the first number, 22: \(22^2 = 22 \times 22 = 484\) Add 6 to this value: \(484 + 6 = 490\) The second number in this pair is 490. This matches the calculated value, so this pair follows the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Pair 4: 21 ∶ 447 Apply the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Square the first number, 21: \(21^2 = 21 \times 21 = 441\) Add 6 to this value: \(441 + 6 = 447\) The second number in this pair is 447. This matches the calculated value, so this pair also follows the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Conclusion Based on our analysis, three of the number pairs follow the pattern where the second number is obtained by squaring the first number and adding 6. The pattern is: \(\text{Second Number} = (\text{First Number})^2 + 6\) Let's summarize our findings in a table: Number Pair First Number (\(x\)) \(x^2\) \(x^2 + 6\) Given Second Number Follows Pattern? 25 ∶ 631 25 625 631 631 Yes 30 ∶ 908 30 900 906 908 No 22 ∶ 490 22 484 490 490 Yes 21 ∶ 447 21 441 447 447 Yes As the table clearly shows, the pair 30 ∶ 908 is the only one that does not follow the pattern \((\text{First number})^2 + 6\). Therefore, the number-pair that is different is 30 ∶ 908. Revision Table: Number Pair Reasoning Concept Description How it Applies Here Number Pair A set of two numbers presented together, often related by a rule. We analyze four given number pairs to find a relationship. Pattern Recognition Identifying a consistent rule or sequence in numbers or objects. We look for a mathematical pattern linking the two numbers in each pair. Odd One Out Selecting the item that does not fit the pattern or category of the others. We find the pair that doesn't follow the pattern observed in the other three. Squaring Numbers Multiplying a number by itself (\(x^2\)). The pattern found involves squaring the first number. Mathematical Relationship A rule or formula connecting numbers (e.g., addition, subtraction, multiplication, powers). The relationship found is \(y = x^2 + 6\), where \(x\) is the first number and \(y\) is the second. Additional Information: Solving Reasoning Patterns When tackling reasoning questions involving number pairs or series, consider these common strategies: Arithmetic Operations: Look for simple addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division between the numbers. Powers and Roots: Check if the second number is related to the square, cube, square root, or cube root of the first number. Combinations: The pattern might involve a combination of operations, like \(x^2 + k\), \(x^3 - k\), \(ax + b\), etc. Digit Properties: Sometimes the pattern relates to the sum of digits, product of digits, or specific digits within the numbers. Prime/Composite Numbers: The relationship might be based on whether the numbers are prime or composite. Sequence Rules: If there's a series of pairs, the pattern might involve the position of the pair or a cumulative rule. Systematically testing potential relationships is key to solving these reasoning pattern problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 21archived

Four words have been given, out of which three are alike in some manner and one is different. Select the word that is different.

  1. A
    Psychiatrists
  2. B
    Cardiologists
  3. C
    Pulmonologists
  4. D
    Nephrologists
Show answer
A. Psychiatrists

Identifying the Different Medical Specialist In this question, we are given four words, all of which represent medical specialists. We need to find the one word that is different from the other three based on some common characteristic. Let's look at the meanings of each word: Psychiatrists: Medical doctors who specialize in the diagnosis, prevention, study, and treatment of mental disorders. Cardiologists: Medical doctors who specialize in diagnosing and treating diseases or conditions of the heart and blood vessels. Pulmonologists: Medical doctors who specialize in diseases of the lungs and respiratory system. Nephrologists: Medical doctors who specialize in kidney diseases. Now let's analyze the specializations: Cardiologists, Pulmonologists, and Nephrologists are all medical doctors who specialize in diseases related to specific physical organ systems in the body: the heart/circulatory system, the lungs/respiratory system, and the kidneys/urinary system, respectively. Psychiatrists, while also medical doctors, specialize in mental health and behavioral disorders. While mental health is intrinsically linked to the brain, a physical organ, the field of psychiatry focuses on the cognitive, emotional, and behavioral aspects rather than purely physical diseases of a specific organ system like cardiology, pulmonology, or nephrology do. Therefore, based on their area of specialization, Psychiatrists are different from Cardiologists, Pulmonologists, and Nephrologists because they focus on mental health, whereas the others focus on specific physical organ systems. The word that is different is Psychiatrists. Revision Table: Comparing Medical Specialists Here is a simple comparison of the areas of focus for these medical specialists: Specialist Area of Focus Psychiatrists Mental health and behavioral disorders Cardiologists Heart and circulatory system Pulmonologists Lungs and respiratory system Nephrologists Kidneys and urinary system As you can see from the table, Psychiatrists have a different area of focus compared to the other three specialists. Additional Information on Medical Specializations The field of medicine is vast and includes many different specializations. These specializations allow doctors to gain deep expertise in specific areas, leading to better diagnosis and treatment for patients. Here are a few other examples of medical specialists: Neurologists: Specialize in disorders of the nervous system (brain, spinal cord, nerves). Gastroenterologists: Specialize in the digestive system. Dermatologists: Specialize in the skin, hair, and nails. Orthopedic Surgeons: Specialize in the musculoskeletal system (bones, joints, ligaments, tendons). Understanding these different areas can help in identifying the odd one out in questions like this, which often test knowledge about categories or groups.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 22archived

Select the option that is embedded in the given figure ( rotation is NOT allowed) .

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
B. Option B (shown in image)

The embedded figure in the given figure ( rotation is NOT allowed ) is given below:- Hence, "Option 2" is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 23archived

Select the cube(s) that can be formed by folding the given sheet along the lines.

Question figureQuestion figure
  1. A
    Only A and D
  2. B
    Only A and C
  3. C
    No figure can be formed
  4. D
    Only C and D
Show answer
C. No figure can be formed

The given figure is:- LetterOpposite AW PJ ET In the above figure alternate letter never sit in one cube-like A and W, P and J, and E and T never sit in one cube. Now, these opposite pairs can NOT be together by seeing from one side if they are together → that cube can not be made. From figure A:- P and J are in the same figure but given figure P and J never sit in one cube. So it can't be formed. From figure B:- A and W are in the same figure but given figure A and W never sit in one cube. So it can't be formed. From figure C:- P and J are in the same figure but given figure P and J never sit in one cube. So it can't be formed. From figure D:- E and T are in the same figure but given figure E and T never sit in one cube. So it can't be formed. Hence, "option 3" is the correct answer.

Solution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figureSolution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 24archived

The sequence of folding a piece of paper and the manner in which the folded paper has been cut is shown in the following figures. How would this paper look when unfolded?

Question figure
  1. A
    Option A (shown in image)Option A figure
  2. B
    Option B (shown in image)Option B figure
  3. C
    Option C (shown in image)Option C figure
  4. D
    Option D (shown in image)Option D figure
Show answer
A. Option A (shown in image)

For this question, we have unfolded the given situation to get the actual image as shown:- So, the final image is similar to option 1. Hence, "option 1" is the correct answer.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 25archived

Select the option that is related to the third word in the same way as the second word is related to the first word. Conceit : Modesty : : Despair : ?

  1. A
    Plain
  2. B
    Gloom
  3. C
    Anguish
  4. D
    Hope
Show answer
D. Hope

Word Analogy Reasoning: Conceit to Modesty, Despair to What? This question asks us to find the word that has the same relationship with "Despair" as "Modesty" has with "Conceit". This type of question tests our vocabulary and understanding of word relationships, specifically antonyms. Understanding the Relationship: Conceit : Modesty Let's analyze the first pair of words: Conceit: This word means excessive pride or self-importance. Someone with conceit is often arrogant or boasts about themselves. Modesty: This word means the quality of being unassuming or moderate in the estimation of one's abilities. A modest person is humble and doesn't boast. Looking at the meanings, "Conceit" and "Modesty" are opposite in meaning. They are antonyms. Applying the Relationship: Despair : ? Now we need to find a word that is the antonym of "Despair". Despair: This word means the complete loss or absence of hope. It is a feeling of hopelessness and dejection. We are looking for the opposite of losing hope, which is having hope. Evaluating the Options Let's look at the given options and see which one is the antonym of "Despair": Option Word Meaning Relationship to Despair 1 Plain Simple, ordinary. Not related. 2 Gloom A state of depression or despondency. Similar meaning (synonym or related). 3 Anguish Severe mental or physical pain or suffering. Related to despair, but not the opposite. 4 Hope A feeling of expectation and desire for a certain thing to happen. Opposite meaning (antonym). Based on the analysis, "Hope" is the direct opposite of "Despair". Therefore, the relationship between Despair and Hope is the same as the relationship between Conceit and Modesty (antonyms). Conclusion The relationship between "Conceit" and "Modesty" is that they are antonyms. We need to find the antonym of "Despair". The antonym of "Despair" is "Hope". Thus, the correct option is "Hope". Revision Table: Key Analogy Terms Word Meaning Antonym Example Conceit Excessive pride Modesty Modesty Humility, lack of boastfulness Conceit Despair Loss of hope Hope Hope Feeling of expectation and desire Despair Additional Information: Understanding Word Analogies Word analogies are common in vocabulary and reasoning tests. They require you to identify the relationship between the first pair of words and then find a word that has the same relationship with the third word. Common relationships in word analogies include: Antonyms (opposites) Synonyms (similar meanings) Part to Whole (e.g., Finger : Hand) Cause and Effect (e.g., Study : Grade) Tool and User (e.g., Pen : Writer) Action and Object (e.g., Read : Book) Category and Item (e.g., Fruit : Apple) Practicing identifying these relationships helps improve vocabulary and logical reasoning skills.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 26archived

Parsec is a unit of ______.

  1. A
    Speed
  2. B
    acceleration
  3. C
    length
  4. D
    time
Show answer
C. length

Understanding the Unit Parsec The question asks about the physical quantity that the unit 'Parsec' measures. Understanding units is fundamental in physics and astronomy as they provide context and scale to measurements. Let's examine the options provided: Speed Acceleration Length Time What is a Parsec? A parsec (symbol: pc) is a unit of length used to measure large distances to astronomical objects outside the Solar System. It is defined as the distance at which one astronomical unit (AU) subtends an angle of one arcsecond. In simpler terms, imagine Earth orbiting the Sun. The average distance between the Earth and the Sun is defined as one Astronomical Unit (AU). Now, picture a star far away. If the angle formed by lines from that star to the Earth at two different points in its orbit (six months apart, essentially seeing the Earth-Sun distance from the star's perspective) is one arcsecond (1/3600th of a degree), then the distance to that star is one parsec. The name 'parsec' itself comes from 'parallax of one arcsecond'. Parallax is the apparent shift in the position of an object when viewed from different angles. Relating Parsec to Other Units of Length A parsec is a very large unit of distance. Its approximate value is: 1 parsec $\approx$ 3.26 light-years 1 parsec $\approx$ 30.86 trillion kilometers (3.086 × 1013 km) 1 parsec $\approx$ 19.2 trillion miles (1.92 × 1013 miles) 1 parsec $\approx$ 206,265 astronomical units (AU) Since the parsec is defined as a distance, it is clearly a unit of length. Analyzing the Options Let's consider why the other options are incorrect: Speed: Speed is the rate at which an object changes its position, typically measured in units like meters per second (m/s), kilometers per hour (km/h), or miles per hour (mph). Parsec does not measure speed. Acceleration: Acceleration is the rate at which an object's velocity changes, measured in units like meters per second squared (m/s²). Parsec does not measure acceleration. Time: Time is measured in units like seconds, minutes, hours, or years. While light-year is a unit of length based on time (the distance light travels in one year), parsec is fundamentally defined based on geometry (the parallax angle and the AU distance), making it a direct measure of length, not time. Length: Length (or distance) is a measure of how far apart two points are. Units include meters, kilometers, miles, astronomical units, light-years, and parsecs. As established, parsec is a unit used for measuring astronomical distances, which is a form of length. Therefore, Parsec is a unit of length. Quantity Common Units Does Parsec measure this? Speed m/s, km/h, mph No Acceleration m/s² No Length (Distance) meter, km, miles, AU, light-year Yes Time second, minute, hour, year No Based on the definition and common usage in astronomy, the parsec is a unit of length for measuring vast cosmic distances. Revision Table: Astronomical Units Unit Quantity Measured Approximate Value Astronomical Unit (AU) Length (Distance) Average distance between Earth and Sun ($\approx$ 150 million km) Light-Year (ly) Length (Distance) Distance light travels in one year ($\approx$ 9.46 trillion km) Parsec (pc) Length (Distance) Distance corresponding to a parallax of one arcsecond ($\approx$ 3.26 light-years) Additional Information on Parsec and Cosmic Distance Measurement Astronomers use various methods to measure distances to stars and galaxies. For relatively nearby stars (within a few hundred parsecs), the parallax method, which gives the parsec its definition, is the primary technique. This method relies on measuring the apparent shift of a star against the background of more distant stars as the Earth orbits the Sun. The larger the parallax angle, the closer the star. For greater distances, other methods are employed, such as using standard candles (objects with known luminosity, like Cepheid variables or Type Ia supernovae) or redshift measurements (for very distant galaxies). However, the parsec remains a fundamental unit in astronomy, often used for galactic and intergalactic scales, typically expressed in kiloparsecs (kpc), megaparsecs (Mpc), or even gigaparsecs (Gpc). Understanding the parsec as a unit of length is crucial for comprehending the vast scales of the universe.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 27archived

In 1977, who became the President of the Janata Party, which formed a coalition government at the centre with Morarji Desai as the Prime Minister?

  1. A
    George Fernandes
  2. B
    Madhu Dandavate
  3. C
    Charan Singh
  4. D
    Chandra Shekhar
Show answer
D. Chandra Shekhar

Understanding the Question: Janata Party Leadership in 1977 The question asks about the individual who served as the President of the Janata Party in the year 1977. This was a significant year in Indian politics as the Janata Party formed the first non-Congress government at the centre following the General Elections, with Morarji Desai becoming the Prime Minister. Formation of the Janata Party and the 1977 Election The Janata Party was formed in 1977 as a coalition of various opposition parties that united against the Emergency rule imposed by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi. These parties included the Indian National Congress (Organisation), the Bharatiya Jana Sangh, the Bharatiya Lok Dal, and the Socialist Party. This formation was a crucial event leading up to the 1977 General Election. In the 1977 election, the Janata Party and its allies achieved a decisive victory, ending decades of Congress rule. Following this victory, Morarji Desai was chosen as the leader of the parliamentary party and consequently sworn in as the Prime Minister of India. Identifying the Janata Party President in 1977 At the time the Janata Party was formed and won the historic 1977 elections, the person who held the position of its President was Chandra Shekhar. Chandra Shekhar was a prominent socialist leader who had been a member of the Congress Party but was imprisoned during the Emergency for his opposition. Upon his release, he played a key role in the formation of the Janata Party. He served as the President of the Janata Party during this critical phase of its formation and rise to power. Analysing the Options Let's consider the provided options in the context of the Janata Party leadership in 1977: George Fernandes: A prominent trade unionist and socialist leader, also a key figure in the Janata Party and a minister in the 1977 government, but not the party president in 1977. Madhu Dandavate: Another respected socialist leader and member of the Janata Party, he served as a minister in the Morarji Desai government. He was not the party president in 1977. Charan Singh: A significant leader of the Bharatiya Lok Dal component of the Janata Party and served as Home Minister and later Deputy Prime Minister in the 1977 government. He became Prime Minister later, but was not the Janata Party President in 1977. Chandra Shekhar: A socialist leader and former Congress member, he was indeed the President of the Janata Party when it came to power in 1977. Based on historical facts, Chandra Shekhar was the President of the Janata Party during the period when Morarji Desai became the Prime Minister in 1977. Conclusion The President of the Janata Party in 1977, when Morarji Desai formed the government at the centre, was Chandra Shekhar. Revision Table: Key Figures of Janata Party in 1977 Role Individual Prime Minister Morarji Desai Janata Party President (1977) Chandra Shekhar Prominent Leaders/Ministers Charan Singh, George Fernandes, Madhu Dandavate, L.K. Advani, Atal Bihari Vajpayee, etc. Additional Information on Chandra Shekhar and Janata Party Chandra Shekhar's presidency of the Janata Party in 1977 was crucial in consolidating the diverse factions that had come together. He was known for his strong anti-establishment stance and his 'Bharat Yatra' (Walk across India) in 1983, which aimed at understanding the rural issues. The Janata Party government of 1977, despite its historic victory, faced internal conflicts and eventually collapsed in 1979. Chandra Shekhar himself would later become the Prime Minister of India for a brief period in 1990-1991, heading a minority government with outside support.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 28archived

In connection with the issue of adoption of villages by parliamentarians, a scheme named ‘SAGY’ was launched. What does the 'A' in SAGY stand for?

  1. A
    Adarsh
  2. B
    Atmanirbhar
  3. C
    Apna
  4. D
    Anubhav
Show answer
A. Adarsh

Understanding the SAGY Scheme for Village Development The question asks about the acronym SAGY, specifically what the letter 'A' stands for, in connection with the adoption of villages by parliamentarians in India. SAGY is a significant government initiative aimed at rural development. Breaking Down the Acronym SAGY SAGY stands for Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana. Let's look at each part of the acronym: S stands for Saansad (meaning Member of Parliament) A stands for Adarsh (meaning Ideal or Model) G stands for Gram (meaning Village) Y stands for Yojana (meaning Scheme) Thus, SAGY translates to the Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana, or the Members of Parliament's Model Village Scheme. Significance of 'Adarsh' in Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana The term 'Adarsh' is central to the scheme's objective. An 'Adarsh Gram' is envisioned as a model village that other villages can emulate. The scheme encourages Members of Parliament (MPs) to adopt villages and guide their development towards becoming 'Adarsh Grams'. This development encompasses various aspects, including social development, infrastructure, environmental sustainability, and good governance. The focus is not just on infrastructure development but also on creating a holistic development model led by the community, inspired and facilitated by the MP. Analysing the Options Let's examine the given options in the context of the SAGY acronym: Option Meaning Relevance to SAGY 1. Adarsh Ideal/Model This aligns directly with the full form of SAGY (Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana). 2. Atmanirbhar Self-reliant While self-reliance is a goal in village development, 'Atmanirbhar' is not part of the official SAGY acronym. 3. Apna Our own This term is not part of the official SAGY acronym. 4. Anubhav Experience This term is not part of the official SAGY acronym. Based on the full form of the Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana, the 'A' in SAGY stands for 'Adarsh'. Conclusion on SAGY Acronym The Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana (SAGY) is a scheme where 'Adarsh' signifies the goal of creating model villages. Therefore, the letter 'A' in SAGY correctly represents 'Adarsh'. Revision Table: Key Details about SAGY Aspect Details Scheme Name Saansad Adarsh Gram Yojana (SAGY) Launched On 11th October 2014 (on the birth anniversary of Jayaprakash Narayan) Objective To develop model villages (Adarsh Grams) through holistic development led by Members of Parliament. Key Focus Areas Social development, infrastructure, clean environment, local economic development, human development, social harmony, and good governance. Role of MP Identify a Gram Panchayat to adopt, formulate and implement a Village Development Plan. Additional Information on Village Development Schemes SAGY is one of several initiatives by the government focused on rural and village development. Understanding the context of such schemes is important for comprehensive knowledge. Other schemes often target specific areas like infrastructure (roads, housing), sanitation, employment generation (MGNREGA), or social security. SAGY is unique in its approach of leveraging the leadership and influence of MPs to drive participatory development and create replicable models. It aims to instil certain values like cleanliness, tranquility, and harmony in the adopted villages, going beyond just physical infrastructure. It is important to distinguish SAGY from other rural development programs and correctly identify the meaning of its components, such as what 'A' stands for, which is 'Adarsh'.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 29archived

Which of the following is an award for contribution in the field of science and technology?

  1. A
    Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (SSB) Award
  2. B
    Deenanath Mangeshkar Award
  3. C
    Jnanpith Award
  4. D
    Dronacharya Award
Show answer
A. Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (SSB) Award

Identifying Science and Technology Awards The question asks us to identify which of the given options represents an award specifically for contributions in the field of science and technology. Analysing the Given Awards Let's examine each option to determine its area of recognition: Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (SSB) Award: This is a prestigious science award in India. It is named after Dr. Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar, the founder Director of the Council of Scientific & Industrial Research (CSIR). The award is given annually by the CSIR for notable and outstanding research, applied or fundamental, in various branches of science and technology. Deenanath Mangeshkar Award: This award is given to individuals for their remarkable contributions to music, art, culture, and social work. It is not related to science and technology. Jnanpith Award: This is India's highest literary award. It is presented annually to Indian writers for their outstanding contribution to literature. It is not related to science and technology. Dronacharya Award: This award is presented by the Government of India for excellence in sports coaching. It recognizes outstanding coaches who have successfully trained sportspersons or teams and enabled them to achieve outstanding results in international competitions. It is not related to science and technology. Based on the analysis of each award's focus area, the Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (SSB) Award is clearly the one presented for contributions in the field of science and technology. Revision Table: Awards in India Award NameField of ContributionAwarded By Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar (SSB) AwardScience and TechnologyCouncil of Scientific & Industrial Research (CSIR) Deenanath Mangeshkar AwardMusic, Art, Culture, Social WorkDeenanath Mangeshkar Smruti Pratishthan Charitable Trust Jnanpith AwardLiteratureBharatiya Jnanpith Dronacharya AwardSports CoachingGovernment of India (Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports) Additional Information on Science and Technology Awards The Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar Prize is considered one of the most coveted science awards in India. It is awarded to scientists below the age of 45. The prize includes a cash component, a citation, and a plaque. The award is given across various scientific disciplines, including Biological Sciences, Chemical Sciences, Earth, Atmosphere, Ocean & Planetary Sciences, Engineering Sciences, Mathematical Sciences, Medical Sciences, and Physical Sciences. Recognizing contributions through awards like the SSB Award is crucial for promoting scientific research and technological development in the country. It motivates scientists and researchers to pursue excellence and innovation.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 30archived

With which of the following sports do you associate the term '16-yard hit'?

  1. A
    Golf
  2. B
    Lawn tennis
  3. C
    Cricket
  4. D
    Field hockey
Show answer
D. Field hockey

Understanding the '16-Yard Hit' in Sports The question asks us to identify the sport associated with the term '16-yard hit'. Let's examine the options provided and understand what this term means in the context of sports. The term '16-yard hit' is a specific rule or action within a particular sport. We need to determine which of the given sports utilizes this term. What is a '16-Yard Hit'? A '16-yard hit', also known as a 'free hit' taken from the 16-yard line, is a common term in field hockey. It is awarded to the defending team in several situations, typically when the attacking team commits an offense within the attacking 23-meter area or when the ball goes over the backline having last been touched by an attacker. It is taken from a spot on the 16-yard line nearest to where the offense occurred or where the ball went out of play. All players from the opposing team must be at least 5 meters away from the ball when the hit is taken. The player taking the hit can either pass the ball to a teammate or run with the ball themselves after taking the hit. Analyzing the Options Let's consider the other sports listed: Golf: Golf involves hitting a ball into a series of holes using clubs. Terms in golf include 'drive', 'putt', 'chip', 'birdie', 'bogey', etc. The term '16-yard hit' is not used in golf. Lawn tennis: Tennis is played on a court with a net, hitting a ball with rackets. Terms include 'serve', 'volley', 'forehand', 'backhand', 'ace', 'deuce', etc. The term '16-yard hit' is not part of tennis terminology. Cricket: Cricket is a bat-and-ball game. Terms include 'bowling', 'batting', 'wicket', 'run', 'four', 'six', 'LBW', etc. The term '16-yard hit' is not used in cricket. Field hockey: As discussed above, the '16-yard hit' is a fundamental concept and action in field hockey rules, used to restart play. Based on the analysis, the term '16-yard hit' is directly associated with field hockey. Conclusion The term '16-yard hit' is a specific rule in field hockey used to restart play from the 16-yard line under certain conditions. It is not a term used in golf, lawn tennis, or cricket. Revision Table: Sports Terminology Sport Associated Term(s) Does it use '16-yard hit'? Golf Drive, Putt, Chip, Birdie No Lawn Tennis Serve, Volley, Ace, Deuce No Cricket Bowler, Batsman, Wicket, Run No Field Hockey 16-yard hit, Penalty corner, Foul Yes Additional Information on Field Hockey Rules Field hockey has various ways to restart play after a stoppage. These include: Centre Pass: Used to start the game and after a goal is scored. Side-in: Awarded when the ball goes off the sideline. 16-Yard Hit: Awarded to the defense when the ball goes over the backline off an attacker, or for certain fouls by attackers in the defensive 23-meter area. Penalty Corner: Awarded for fouls by defenders in the circle or intentional fouls in the 23-meter area. Penalty Stroke: Awarded for fouls by defenders that prevent a probable goal. Free Hit: Awarded for most fouls outside the circles. Understanding these different restarts helps in comprehending the flow and rules of field hockey, including the specific instance of a '16-yard hit'.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 31archived

Which of the following is the SI unit for measuring the amount of a substance?

  1. A
    kelvin (K)
  2. B
    candela (cd)
  3. C
    mole (mol)
  4. D
    metre (m)
Show answer
C. mole (mol)

Understanding the SI Unit for Amount of Substance The question asks to identify the SI unit used for measuring the amount of a substance. In science and chemistry, it is essential to have a standard way to quantify how much of a substance is present, not by its mass or volume necessarily, but by the number of fundamental particles it contains. The International System of Units (SI) provides a standard set of base units for various physical quantities. Let's look at the options provided and see which one corresponds to the measurement of the amount of a substance. Analyzing the Options for Amount of Substance SI Unit kelvin (K): The kelvin is the SI base unit for thermodynamic temperature. It measures how hot or cold something is. Therefore, kelvin is not the unit for the amount of a substance. candela (cd): The candela is the SI base unit for luminous intensity. It measures the power emitted by a light source in a particular direction, weighted by the luminosity function. This unit is related to light, not the amount of substance. mole (mol): The mole is defined as the amount of a substance that contains exactly $6.02214076 \times 10^{23}$ elementary entities. These entities can be atoms, molecules, ions, electrons, or any other specified group of particles. This definition directly relates the mole to the number of particles, which is how the amount of substance is measured. Thus, the mole is the correct SI unit for the amount of a substance. metre (m): The metre is the SI base unit for length. It measures distance. Therefore, metre is not the unit for the amount of a substance. The Correct SI Unit for Amount of Substance Based on the analysis of the options and the definitions of the SI base units, the unit specifically designed to measure the amount of a substance is the mole (mol). Here is a summary of the seven SI base units and the physical quantities they measure: Quantity SI Base Unit Symbol Length metre m Mass kilogram kg Time second s Electric current ampere A Thermodynamic temperature kelvin K Amount of substance mole mol Luminous intensity candela cd As the table clearly shows, the mole (mol) is the SI base unit for the amount of substance. Revision Table: SI Units and Amount of Substance Concept Key Point Amount of Substance Measures the quantity of elementary entities (atoms, molecules, etc.). SI Unit International standard system of measurement. Mole (mol) The SI base unit for Amount of Substance. Avogadro's Number The number of entities in one mole ($\approx 6.022 \times 10^{23}$). Additional Information on the Mole and Amount of Substance The concept of the mole is fundamental in chemistry. It provides a way to relate the macroscopic properties of a substance (like mass or volume) to the microscopic world of atoms and molecules. For example, the molar mass of a substance is the mass of one mole of that substance, usually expressed in grams per mole (g/mol). This is a very useful concept for calculations involving chemical reactions. Understanding the mole allows chemists to predict the amounts of reactants and products in chemical reactions using balanced chemical equations, where coefficients represent the relative number of moles of each substance involved.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 32archived

The rules made for the ______ were written down in a book called ‘Vinaya Pitaka'.

  1. A
    Shakta cult
  2. B
    Buddhist sangha
  3. C
    Vaishnavites
  4. D
    Lingayats
Show answer
B. Buddhist sangha

Understanding Vinaya Pitaka and Buddhist Sangha Rules The question asks about the specific group for whom the rules documented in the religious text called ‘Vinaya Pitaka’ were created. The Vinaya Pitaka is a key religious text in Buddhism. It is one of the three parts of the Tripitaka, which is the traditional collection of Buddhist scriptures. The word ‘Vinaya’ generally translates to discipline or conduct, and the Vinaya Pitaka is primarily concerned with the rules and regulations governing the monastic community. The Buddhist Sangha is the monastic community of ordained Buddhist monks and nuns. It is one of the "Three Jewels" of Buddhism (the other two being the Buddha and the Dharma or teachings). The Vinaya Pitaka contains a detailed set of rules, procedures, and guidelines for the members of the Buddhist Sangha. These rules cover various aspects of monastic life, including: Rules related to ordination Regulations concerning daily life, conduct, and discipline Procedures for resolving conflicts within the community Guidelines for communal living Let’s briefly look at the other options: Shakta cult: This refers to a major tradition of Hinduism focused on the worship of Shakti or Devi (the Divine Mother). Their scriptures and rules are distinct from Buddhism. Vaishnavites: These are followers of Vishnu, one of the principal deities of Hinduism. Their religious texts include Puranas and Agamas related to Vishnu worship. Lingayats: This is a distinct religious tradition in India, primarily focused on the worship of Shiva. Their practices and texts are separate from Buddhist traditions. Based on the content of the Vinaya Pitaka, it is clear that the rules within this text were specifically compiled for the members of the Buddhist Sangha to guide their conduct and maintain order within the monastic community. Therefore, the rules made for the Buddhist sangha were written down in a book called ‘Vinaya Pitaka'. Text Primary Focus Associated Group Vinaya Pitaka Monastic Rules & Discipline Buddhist Sangha Related Hindu Texts (e.g., Puranas, Agamas) Deity Worship, Rituals, Philosophy Shakta, Vaishnavites, Lingayats (depending on tradition) Revision Table: Key Concepts Term Description Vinaya Pitaka Collection of Buddhist scriptures focusing on monastic rules. Buddhist Sangha The monastic community of monks and nuns in Buddhism. Tripitaka The traditional collection of Buddhist scriptures, consisting of Vinaya Pitaka, Sutta Pitaka, and Abhidhamma Pitaka. Additional Information on Buddhist Texts and Rules The Tripitaka, also known as the Pali Canon (in Theravada Buddhism), is divided into three ‘baskets’ or sections: Vinaya Pitaka: Contains the rules and regulations for the monastic order (Sangha). Sutta Pitaka: Contains the discourses and teachings attributed to the Buddha and sometimes his close disciples. Abhidhamma Pitaka: Contains philosophical and psychological analysis and systematization of the teachings. The rules in the Vinaya Pitaka, known as the Pratimoksha (or Patimokkha), are central to the discipline of the Buddhist Sangha and are recited regularly by monks and nuns.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 33archived

IPR 1956 formed the basis of the ______ Five Year Plan of India.

  1. A
    First
  2. B
    Third
  3. C
    Second
  4. D
    Fourth
Show answer
C. Second

Understanding the Industrial Policy Resolution 1956 (IPR 1956) and its Impact The Industrial Policy Resolution of 1956 (IPR 1956) was a landmark statement by the Government of India that significantly shaped the direction of the Indian economy and industrial development for decades. It laid down the framework for classifying industries and defined the respective roles of the public and private sectors in the process of industrialization. Key Features of IPR 1956 The IPR 1956 outlined several important principles: It categorized industries into three schedules, reserving certain key industries primarily for the public sector. It emphasized the role of the state in accelerating industrialization, especially in basic and heavy industries. It promoted import substitution to achieve self-reliance. It aimed at reducing disparities in income and wealth and preventing monopolies. It stressed the importance of cottage and small-scale industries for employment generation and regional development. IPR 1956 and India's Five Year Plans India adopted a system of Five Year Plans for its planned economic development. Each plan had specific objectives and strategies. The IPR 1956 provided the foundational policy framework that guided the strategy of one particular Five Year Plan. Let's look at the objectives and focus of the initial Five Year Plans: First Five Year Plan (1951-1956): Primarily focused on agriculture, irrigation, and power projects to address food shortages and lay basic infrastructure. Second Five Year Plan (1956-1961): This plan, also known as the Mahalanobis Plan, emphasized rapid industrialization, with a focus on heavy industries like steel, coal, heavy engineering, and machine-building. It strongly advocated for a dominant role for the public sector in these strategic areas. Third Five Year Plan (1961-1966): Aimed at self-sufficiency in food grains and expansion of basic industries, continuing the thrust on industrialization from the Second Plan. Fourth Five Year Plan (1969-1974): Focused on growth with stability and progressive achievement of self-reliance, addressing issues like poverty and income distribution. Comparing the features of the IPR 1956 with the focus of the Five Year Plans, it becomes evident that the principles and objectives outlined in the IPR 1956 directly aligned with and formed the basis for the strategy adopted during the Second Five Year Plan. The strong emphasis on heavy industries, the expansion of the public sector, and rapid industrialization were the cornerstones of the Second Plan, all derived from the IPR 1956. Conclusion The Industrial Policy Resolution 1956 was instrumental in shaping India's path towards becoming an industrialized nation. Its focus on state intervention and heavy industries directly translated into the strategic priorities of the Second Five Year Plan. Therefore, the IPR 1956 formed the basis of the Second Five Year Plan of India. Policy/Plan Period Key Focus Relevant to IPR 1956 IPR 1956 1956 Framework for industrial development; emphasis on public sector, heavy industry, import substitution. First Five Year Plan ${1951 \text{-} 1956}$ Agriculture, infrastructure. Second Five Year Plan ${1956 \text{-} 1961}$ Rapid industrialization; heavy industries; public sector dominance (aligned with IPR 1956). Third Five Year Plan ${1961 \text{-} 1966}$ Self-sufficiency in food; continued industrial expansion. Revision Table: IPR 1956 & Five Year Plans This table summarizes the connection: Policy/Plan Significance Industrial Policy Resolution 1956 Defined the framework for industrial development, emphasizing the public sector and heavy industries. Second Five Year Plan (1956-1961) Implemented the strategy based on the IPR 1956, focusing on rapid industrialization and heavy industries. Additional Information: Mahalanobis Model and Second Plan The Second Five Year Plan was heavily influenced by the Mahalanobis model, developed by statistician P. C. Mahalanobis. This model advocated for a strategy of investing heavily in capital goods industries to achieve long-term growth. This approach was directly in line with the IPR 1956's focus on heavy and basic industries under state control, further cementing the IPR 1956 as the foundation for this plan's strategy.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 34archived

_______ is the largest union territory in India in terms of area.

  1. A
    Chandigarh
  2. B
    Puducherry
  3. C
    Ladakh
  4. D
    Jammu and kashmir
Show answer
C. Ladakh

Understanding India's Union Territories and Area India is divided into States and Union Territories (UTs). States have their own elected governments, while Union Territories are directly governed by the Central Government of India, although some have legislative assemblies. The question asks to identify the largest union territory in India in terms of area. To answer this, we need to compare the geographical areas of the various Union Territories currently existing in India. Comparing Areas of Indian Union Territories Let's look at the approximate areas of some of the major Union Territories: Union Territory Approximate Area (in sq km) Ladakh 59,146 Jammu and Kashmir 42,241 Andaman and Nicobar Islands 8,249 Delhi 1,484 Puducherry 490 Dadra and Nagar Haveli and Daman and Diu 603 Chandigarh 114 Lakshadweep 32 From the table above, we can clearly see the areas of the Union Territories listed in the options: Chandigarh: Approximately 114 sq km Puducherry: Approximately 490 sq km Ladakh: Approximately 59,146 sq km Jammu and Kashmir: Approximately 42,241 sq km Comparing these figures, Ladakh has the largest area among the given options and is also the largest Union Territory in India overall by area. Identifying the Largest Union Territory by Area Based on the area comparison, Ladakh stands out as having the largest geographical expanse among all the Union Territories of India. It was constituted as a Union Territory on 31 October 2019, following the Jammu and Kashmir Reorganisation Act, 2019. Its vast area covers a significant portion of the former state of Jammu and Kashmir. Therefore, the Union Territory that is the largest in India in terms of area is Ladakh. Revision Table: Key Facts about UTs Feature Details Definition of UT Directly governed by the Central Government Largest UT by Area Ladakh Second Largest UT by Area (among options) Jammu and Kashmir Smallest UT by Area Lakshadweep Additional Information: Union Territories of India As of recent reorganizations, India currently has 8 Union Territories: Andaman and Nicobar Islands Chandigarh Dadra and Nagar Haveli and Daman and Diu Delhi (National Capital Territory of Delhi) Jammu and Kashmir Ladakh Lakshadweep Puducherry While Delhi and Puducherry, and Jammu and Kashmir have their own legislative assemblies, others are governed more directly by the central government representative (Lieutenant Governor or Administrator). Knowing the areas and locations of these Union Territories is important for understanding India's political geography.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 35archived

Atoms of which element combines with hydrogen to give water?

  1. A
    Iodine
  2. B
    Oxygen
  3. C
    Carbon
  4. D
    Nitrogen
Show answer
B. Oxygen

Understanding Water Composition: Which Element Combines with Hydrogen? The question asks us to identify the element that combines with hydrogen atoms to form water. Water is one of the most common and essential substances on Earth. Its chemical composition is well-defined. The chemical formula for water is known to be H\(_2\)O. This formula tells us exactly which elements are present in a water molecule and in what proportion. The 'H' in the formula stands for the element Hydrogen. The 'O' in the formula stands for the element Oxygen. The subscript '2' next to 'H' indicates that there are two atoms of hydrogen in each water molecule. When there is no subscript next to an element symbol (like 'O'), it means there is one atom of that element in the molecule. Therefore, the chemical formula H\(_2\)O shows that one molecule of water is made up of two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom. This directly tells us that hydrogen atoms combine with oxygen atoms to form water. Chemical Reaction to Form Water Water is formed when hydrogen gas (H\(_2\)) reacts with oxygen gas (O\(_2\)). The balanced chemical equation for this reaction is: \(2\text{H}_2\text{(g)} + \text{O}_2\text{(g)} \rightarrow 2\text{H}_2\text{O(l)}\) This equation shows that hydrogen and oxygen combine chemically under suitable conditions to produce water. The reaction involves the atoms of hydrogen and oxygen rearranging to form new chemical bonds in water molecules. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the given options and see which one fits the chemical composition of water: Iodine: Iodine is a halogen element (symbol I). It does not combine with hydrogen to form water. It can form hydrogen iodide (HI), which is a different compound. Oxygen: Oxygen is a non-metal element (symbol O). As we saw from the formula H\(_2\)O, oxygen atoms combine with hydrogen atoms to form water. This matches the known composition of water. Carbon: Carbon is an element (symbol C) that forms a vast number of compounds, particularly organic compounds. Carbon combines with hydrogen to form hydrocarbons (like methane, CH\(_4\)), not water. Nitrogen: Nitrogen is an element (symbol N) that makes up a large part of the Earth's atmosphere. Nitrogen combines with hydrogen to form ammonia (NH\(_3\)), not water. Based on the chemical formula of water (H\(_2\)O) and the elements involved in its formation, Oxygen is the element that combines with hydrogen to give water. Element Symbol Combines with Hydrogen to Form Forms Water? Iodine I Hydrogen Iodide (HI) No Oxygen O Water (H\(_2\)O) Yes Carbon C Hydrocarbons (e.g., CH\(_4\)) No Nitrogen N Ammonia (NH\(_3\)) No Conclusion The element that combines with hydrogen to form water is Oxygen, as represented by the chemical formula H\(_2\)O. Revision Table: Water Formation Key Concepts Concept Description Chemical Formula of Water H\(_2\)O Elements in Water Hydrogen (H) and Oxygen (O) Atoms per molecule 2 Hydrogen atoms, 1 Oxygen atom Formation Chemical reaction between Hydrogen and Oxygen Additional Information: Properties of Hydrogen and Oxygen Understanding the properties of Hydrogen and Oxygen helps explain why they combine to form water. Hydrogen (H): It is the lightest element. It exists as a diatomic gas (H\(_2\)) under normal conditions. It is highly flammable and reacts readily with oxygen. Oxygen (O): It is a highly reactive non-metal. It exists as a diatomic gas (O\(_2\)) under normal conditions. Oxygen is essential for combustion and respiration. When hydrogen and oxygen react, they form strong bonds, releasing a significant amount of energy, which is why the reaction can be explosive. The combination of these two elements results in water, a stable compound with properties vastly different from its constituent elements, such as being a liquid at room temperature and being essential for life.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 36archived

Who is the General Secretary of Communist Party of India as of January 2021?

  1. A
    Sujan Chakrabarti
  2. B
    Brinda Karat
  3. C
    S Sudhakar Reddy
  4. D
    D Raja
Show answer
D. D Raja

General Secretary of Communist Party of India Explained The General Secretary is a key leadership position within a political party. They often serve as the chief executive or administrative head, responsible for the party's day-to-day functioning, organization, and strategy. In the Communist Party of India (CPI), the General Secretary holds significant authority and represents the party both nationally and internationally. Identifying the CPI General Secretary in January 2021 The question asks specifically about the General Secretary of the Communist Party of India (CPI) as of January 2021. To answer this, we need to know who held that position at that specific time. Based on the records of the Communist Party of India (CPI), the leader who held the position of General Secretary in January 2021 was D Raja. Analysis of Options for CPI General Secretary Let's look at the provided options and understand why D Raja was the correct person and why the others were not the General Secretary of the CPI in January 2021: Sujan Chakrabarti: Sujan Chakrabarti is a prominent leader, but he is associated with the Communist Party of India (Marxist), or CPI(M), which is a different political party from the CPI. He is not a member or leader of the CPI. Brinda Karat: Brinda Karat is also a well-known figure in Indian politics, and she is a leader of the Communist Party of India (Marxist) (CPI(M)), not the Communist Party of India (CPI). S Sudhakar Reddy: S Sudhakar Reddy served as the General Secretary of the Communist Party of India (CPI) before D Raja. D Raja took over the position from S Sudhakar Reddy in July 2019. Therefore, in January 2021, S Sudhakar Reddy was not the General Secretary. D Raja: D Raja assumed the role of General Secretary of the Communist Party of India (CPI) in July 2019. He continued to hold this position through January 2021 and beyond. Thus, he was the General Secretary of the CPI at that time. Summary of the Correct CPI Leader In summary, verifying the leadership of the Communist Party of India (CPI) in January 2021 confirms that D Raja was serving as the General Secretary during that period. Revision Table - CPI Leadership Position Holder (as of Jan 2021) Notes General Secretary (CPI) D Raja Assumed office July 2019 Former General Secretary (CPI) S Sudhakar Reddy Predecessor to D Raja Prominent Leaders (CPI(M)) Sujan Chakrabarti, Brinda Karat Leaders of a different party (CPI(M)) Additional Information - Communist Party of India (CPI) The Communist Party of India (CPI) is one of the oldest political parties in India. It was founded in 1925. The party's ideology is based on Marxism-Leninism. It has historically played a significant role in India's labour movements and political landscape. The CPI is distinct from the Communist Party of India (Marxist) (CPI(M)), which originated from a split in the CPI in 1964. Both parties advocate for socialist principles but have different organizational structures and political strategies.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 37archived

Who is the author of the book, 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket'?

  1. A
    Boria Mazumdar
  2. B
    Harsha Bhogle
  3. C
    Mukul Kesavan
  4. D
    Sanjay Manjrekar
Show answer
C. Mukul Kesavan

Analyzing the Author of 'Men in White' Cricket Book The question asks to identify the author of the book titled 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket'. This is a question about sports literature, specifically focusing on books about cricket. To answer this, one needs to know the prominent authors in the field of cricket writing and their notable works. Identifying the Author of 'Men in White' 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket' is a well-known collection of essays and writings on the sport of cricket. It delves into various aspects of the game, its history, culture, and significant moments. Authors who write on cricket often have deep insights into the game, whether as journalists, historians, players, or ardent followers. Let's consider the provided options: Boria Mazumdar: A prominent Indian sports historian and journalist, known for books like 'Cricket Nation'. Harsha Bhogle: A very famous Indian cricket commentator and journalist. He has also authored books on cricket, such as 'Out of the Box'. Mukul Kesavan: An Indian historian, essayist, and novelist. He is notably the author of 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket'. Sanjay Manjrekar: A former Indian cricketer and now a well-known commentator. He has also written an autobiography titled 'Imperfect'. Based on the authorship of 'Men in White', the correct individual is Mukul Kesavan. His book is recognized for its engaging prose and insightful perspectives on the game's nuances. Confirming the Author Various sources confirm that Mukul Kesavan is indeed the author of 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket'. This book is considered one of his significant contributions to sports literature, particularly in the context of Indian writing on cricket. Revision Table: Cricket Authors and Their Works Author Known For Notable Cricket Book(s) Mukul Kesavan Historian, Essayist 'Men in White - A Book of Cricket' Boria Mazumdar Sports Historian, Journalist 'Cricket Nation', 'Sachin Tendulkar: A Definitive Biography' Harsha Bhogle Cricket Commentator, Journalist 'Out of the Box: The Harsha Bhogle Story' Sanjay Manjrekar Former Cricketer, Commentator 'Imperfect' (Autobiography) Additional Information: Understanding Cricket Literature Cricket literature encompasses a wide range of books, from historical accounts and biographies to analytical essays and fictional works centered around the sport. 'Men in White' falls into the category of essays and reflections on cricket, offering a literary perspective on the game. Studying authors and their works helps in understanding the various facets of cricket writing and the contributions made by different personalities to documenting and interpreting the sport. Mukul Kesavan's 'Men in White' is a notable example of insightful cricket writing.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 38archived

______ festival in the Bastar region is celebrated along with the worship of the local goddess, Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi.

  1. A
    Madai
  2. B
    Phool Dei
  3. C
    Khatarua
  4. D
    Harela
Show answer
A. Madai

Understanding Festivals in the Bastar Region The question asks us to identify a specific festival celebrated in the Bastar region of Chhattisgarh that involves the worship of the local goddess, Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. The Bastar region is known for its rich tribal culture and unique festivals. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the provided options and see which one fits the description: Madai Phool Dei Khatarua Harela We need to determine which of these festivals is primarily associated with the Bastar region and the worship of Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. Examining the Madai Festival The Madai festival is a significant cultural and religious event widely celebrated in the Bastar region and other parts of Chhattisgarh and neighbouring states with tribal populations. It is not a single-day event but a series of festivals held in different locations across the region during the winter season (typically from December to March). The festival involves: Processions carrying local deities. Gatherings of people from nearby villages. Cultural performances, music, and dance. Markets and fairs. Worship of local goddesses and deities. Crucially, the Madai festival held in specific locations within the Bastar region, such as Kesharpal, is directly linked to the worship of the presiding deity of that area, which in this case is Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. The festival serves as an annual congregation for the local community to pay homage to the goddess and seek blessings. Evaluating Other Options Let's briefly consider the other options: Phool Dei: This is primarily a harvest festival celebrated in the state of Uttarakhand, usually in March. It involves children offering flowers and sweets to the doorways of houses. It is not associated with the Bastar region or Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. Khatarua: This festival is also mainly celebrated in Uttarakhand and parts of Himachal Pradesh. It marks the beginning of the autumn season and involves bonfires. It is not associated with the Bastar region or Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. Harela: This is a Hindu festival celebrated in Uttarakhand and parts of Himachal Pradesh, typically in the month of Shravan (July/August). It is associated with greenery and the monsoon season. It is not associated with the Bastar region or Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. Based on the geographical and religious associations, the Madai festival is the only option that aligns with being celebrated in the Bastar region and involving the worship of a local goddess like Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi. Conclusion The festival in the Bastar region that is celebrated along with the worship of the local goddess, Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi, is the Madai festival. This festival is a central part of the cultural and religious life in Bastar, involving community gatherings and deity worship. Therefore, the correct answer is Madai. Revision Table: Festivals and Regions Festival Primary Region/State Associated Deity/Theme Madai Bastar Region (Chhattisgarh), Odisha, Telangana, Andhra Pradesh Local deities, community gatherings, cultural exchange (includes Kesharpal Kesharpalin Devi in Kesharpal) Phool Dei Uttarakhand Harvest, spring, nature (flowers) Khatarua Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh Beginning of autumn, bonfires Harela Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh Greenery, monsoon, Shiva-Parvati wedding Additional Information on Bastar Festivals Bastar is renowned for its vibrant tribal festivals, which are deeply connected to nature, local deities, and community life. These festivals are not just religious events but also social gatherings, cultural performances, and economic activities (through associated markets). Besides Madai, other notable festivals in the Bastar region include: Bastar Dussehra: A unique and extended Dussehra celebration lasting over 75 days, centered around the goddess Danteshwari. Goncha Festival: Celebrated during Rath Yatra, involving a unique tradition of shooting 'gonchas' (bamboo pistols) with 'tukis' (fruit missiles). Hareli: An agricultural festival celebrated in July/August, marking the start of the sowing season. These festivals highlight the distinct traditions and cultural identity of the indigenous communities in the Bastar region.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 39archived

Which of the following is a district-cum-tourism hotspot of Arunachal Pradesh?

  1. A
    Tawang
  2. B
    Alipurdaur
  3. C
    Jalpaiguri
  4. D
    Kalimpong
Show answer
A. Tawang

Identifying Arunachal Pradesh Tourism Hotspots The question asks to identify which option represents a district that is also a significant tourism hotspot within Arunachal Pradesh. Let's examine the options provided: Tawang Alipurdaur Jalpaiguri Kalimpong To answer this, we need to consider the geographical location and tourism significance of each place. Analyzing the Options Let's look at where each place is located and its status as a district and tourism area: Tawang: Tawang is a district located in the state of Arunachal Pradesh, India. It is widely recognized as a major tourism destination known for its stunning natural beauty, rich culture, and significant Buddhist monasteries, including the famous Tawang Monastery. Alipurdaur: Alipurduar is a district located in the state of West Bengal, India, in the foothills of the Himalayas. While it has tourism potential, especially with Buxa Tiger Reserve nearby, it is not located in Arunachal Pradesh. Jalpaiguri: Jalpaiguri is also a district located in the state of West Bengal, India, known for tea gardens and proximity to Dooars forests. It is not in Arunachal Pradesh. Kalimpong: Kalimpong is a town and district in the state of West Bengal, India, famous for its scenic beauty, monasteries, and nurseries. It is not located in Arunachal Pradesh. Based on the analysis, Tawang is the only option that is both a district and a significant tourism hotspot located within the state of Arunachal Pradesh. Why Tawang is a Tourism Hotspot District Tawang's appeal as a tourism hotspot stems from several factors: It is home to the second largest monastery in the world, the Tawang Monastery, which is a major cultural and religious attraction. The district offers breathtaking landscapes with high mountains, valleys, lakes like Pankang Teng Tso and Sela Lake, and waterfalls. It has historical significance, being the birthplace of the 6th Dalai Lama. The unique Monpa culture of the region is also a significant draw for tourists interested in local traditions and lifestyle. Comparison of Options Place State District Status Tourism Hotspot Tawang Arunachal Pradesh Yes Yes (Major) Alipurdaur West Bengal Yes Yes (Moderate/Developing) Jalpaiguri West Bengal Yes Yes (Moderate) Kalimpong West Bengal Yes Yes (Significant) From the table, it is clear that only Tawang fits the criteria of being a district-cum-tourism hotspot specifically in Arunachal Pradesh. Conclusion on Arunachal Pradesh Hotspot District Considering the location and tourism importance of each place, Tawang is the district in Arunachal Pradesh that is widely known as a major tourism hotspot. Revision Table: Arunachal Pradesh Tourism Key Term Description Arunachal Pradesh A state in Northeast India, known for its natural beauty and cultural diversity. Tawang District A district in Arunachal Pradesh famous for its monastery and scenic landscapes. Tourism Hotspot A place that attracts a large number of tourists. District An administrative division of a state or territory. Additional Information on Arunachal Pradesh Tourism Arunachal Pradesh, often called the "Land of the Dawn-Lit Mountains," is a state rich in biodiversity and cultural heritage. Besides Tawang, other places of interest in Arunachal Pradesh include: Itanagar (the capital) Ziro Valley (known for the Apatani tribe) Bomdila (another beautiful town with a monastery) Along (now Aalo, known for its scenic beauty) The state offers various types of tourism, including adventure tourism (trekking, river rafting), cultural tourism (visiting tribal areas and monasteries), and nature tourism (exploring wildlife sanctuaries and national parks).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 40archived

The Kamaicha is a bowed lute played by the Manganiars of:

  1. A
    west Kerala
  2. B
    west Bihar
  3. C
    west Rajasthan
  4. D
    west Goa
Show answer
C. west Rajasthan

Understanding the Kamaicha and Manganiars of Rajasthan The question asks about the region where the Kamaicha, a specific type of bowed lute, is played by a community known as the Manganiars. This relates to the traditional folk music and culture of India. The Kamaicha is a unique string instrument. It is a bowed lute, meaning it is played by drawing a bow across the strings, similar to a violin or cello, but it is a traditional Indian instrument with a distinct sound and structure. The Manganiars are a hereditary community of musicians primarily found in the desert regions of India and Pakistan. They have a rich tradition of folk music and are known for playing various instruments, including the Kamaicha. Let's look at the options provided: west Kerala west Bihar west Rajasthan west Goa The Manganiar community is most strongly associated with the western part of Rajasthan, particularly in the Thar Desert region. Their music is an integral part of the culture of this area. The Kamaicha is one of the principal instruments used by the Manganiars in their performances, often accompanying vocal music. Considering the geographical distribution and cultural association of the Manganiar community and the Kamaicha instrument, the correct region is west Rajasthan. The other options are not correct: West Kerala is known for different musical traditions and communities. West Bihar also has its own unique folk music but not typically associated with Manganiars or the Kamaicha. West Goa has distinct musical forms, influenced by local and historical factors, different from the music of the Manganiars. Therefore, the Kamaicha bowed lute is played by the Manganiars primarily in west Rajasthan. Revision Table: Key Facts about Kamaicha and Manganiars Aspect Description Instrument Name Kamaicha Instrument Type Bowed Lute Playing Method Played with a bow Associated Community Manganiars Primary Region West Rajasthan, India Cultural Context Traditional Folk Music Additional Information: Folk Music of Rajasthan Rajasthan has a vibrant and diverse tradition of folk music and dance. The state is home to several communities of hereditary musicians and performers, including the Manganiars and the Langas. These communities have historically performed for patrons and continue to preserve and evolve their musical heritage. The Kamaicha is an important instrument in the folk music of Rajasthan. It is typically carved from a single piece of wood and has a goat-skin resonator. It has multiple strings, usually three main gut strings (which are bowed) and several sympathetic strings (which resonate without being directly bowed, adding to the richness of the sound). The music played on the Kamaicha often features complex melodies and rhythmic patterns, reflecting the unique style of the Manganiar musicians. Learning about these instruments and communities helps us appreciate the depth and variety of India's cultural landscape.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 41archived

Which of the following diseases is caused by bacteria?

  1. A
    Diphtheria
  2. B
    Zika fever
  3. C
    Polio
  4. D
    Rubelia
Show answer
A. Diphtheria

Understanding Bacterial vs. Viral Diseases The question asks us to identify which of the listed diseases is caused by bacteria. To answer this, we need to know the causative agent for each disease provided in the options. Analyzing the Disease Options and Causes Let's examine each option: Diphtheria: This is a serious infection caused by strains of bacteria called Corynebacterium diphtheriae that make toxin. Zika fever: This illness is caused by the Zika virus. It is transmitted primarily by Aedes mosquitoes. Polio: Poliomyelitis, or polio, is a disabling and life-threatening disease caused by the poliovirus. Rubella: Also known as German measles or three-day measles, Rubella is an infection caused by the rubella virus. Based on this information, we can see that Diphtheria is caused by a bacterium, while Zika fever, Polio, and Rubella are caused by viruses. Identifying the Bacterial Disease Comparing the causative agents: Disease Causative Agent Type of Agent Diphtheria Corynebacterium diphtheriae Bacteria Zika fever Zika virus Virus Polio Poliovirus Virus Rubella Rubella virus Virus Therefore, the disease caused by bacteria among the given options is Diphtheria. Revision Table: Key Disease Types Category Characteristics Examples (from options) Bacterial Diseases Caused by single-celled organisms called bacteria. Can often be treated with antibiotics. Diphtheria Viral Diseases Caused by viruses, which are much smaller than bacteria and require living hosts to reproduce. Antibiotics are not effective against viruses. Zika fever, Polio, Rubella Additional Information: Understanding Bacteria and Viruses It's important to understand the basic difference between bacteria and viruses as they cause different types of infections and require different treatments. Bacteria: These are prokaryotic microorganisms. Most are harmless, and some are even beneficial (like those in our gut). However, pathogenic bacteria can cause diseases like strep throat, urinary tract infections, and Diphtheria. Viruses: These are obligate intracellular parasites, meaning they can only reproduce inside the living cells of other organisms. They are much smaller than bacteria. Viral diseases include the common cold, flu, chickenpox, Polio, Zika fever, and Rubella. Understanding whether a disease is bacterial or viral is crucial for proper diagnosis and treatment, as antibiotics work against bacteria but not viruses.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 42archived

The archaeological site of Atranjikhera is located in ______.

  1. A
    Himachal Pradesh
  2. B
    Uttarakhand
  3. C
    Uttar Pradesh
  4. D
    Maharashtra
Show answer
C. Uttar Pradesh

Understanding the Archaeological Site of Atranjikhera Let's analyze the location of the important archaeological site known as Atranjikhera. Understanding the geographical context of historical sites is crucial for studying ancient Indian history and archaeology. Identifying the Location of Atranjikhera Atranjikhera is a significant archaeological site that has yielded important artifacts and information about various periods of Indian history, particularly the Iron Age. Excavations at this site have provided insights into early human settlements, agricultural practices, and technological developments in ancient India. Based on extensive archaeological research and historical records, the site of Atranjikhera is situated in the state of Uttar Pradesh in India. Geographical Context within Uttar Pradesh Atranjikhera is located in the Etah district of Uttar Pradesh. Its location along the Kali River (a tributary of the Yamuna) was strategically important for early inhabitants. Significance of Atranjikhera Findings Archaeological excavations at Atranjikhera have uncovered evidence dating back to different cultural phases, including: Ochre Coloured Pottery (OCP) culture Painted Grey Ware (PGW) culture Northern Black Polished Ware (NBPW) culture The findings here have significantly contributed to our understanding of the transition from the Late Harappan period to the Iron Age in the Gangetic plain. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the provided options: Himachal Pradesh: This state is located in the northern Himalayas and is known for different historical sites, but Atranjikhera is not located here. Uttarakhand: Also a northern state, part of the Himalayan region. Atranjikhera is not located in Uttarakhand. Uttar Pradesh: This large state in northern India is home to many important historical and archaeological sites, including Atranjikhera. Maharashtra: Located in western India, Maharashtra has its own set of significant historical sites, distinct from Atranjikhera. Comparing the known location of Atranjikhera with the given options, it is clear that the site is located in Uttar Pradesh. Revision Table: Key Details about Atranjikhera Aspect Detail Site Name Atranjikhera Location Uttar Pradesh, India District Etah District Associated Cultures OCP, PGW, NBPW Significance Major Iron Age site, evidence of early agriculture & settlements Additional Information: Archaeological Sites in Uttar Pradesh Uttar Pradesh is a state rich in archaeological heritage. Apart from Atranjikhera, other notable sites include: Sarnath (near Varanasi): Famous for Buddhist monuments, where Buddha gave his first sermon. Kaushambi (near Prayagraj): An ancient city important during the Mahajanapada period and later Buddhism. Ahichchhatra (near Bareilly): Capital of Northern Panchala Mahajanapada, known for terracotta figures. Hastinapur (near Meerut): Mentioned in the Mahabharata, site of PGW culture findings. These sites, including Atranjikhera, provide invaluable data for reconstructing the history and culture of ancient India, particularly the Gangetic plain region.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 43archived

Weber per second is equivalent to ______.

  1. A
    ampere
  2. B
    volt
  3. C
    ohm
  4. D
    coulomb
Show answer
B. volt

The correct answer is volt. Key Points Weber per second is equal to volt. The SI unit of magnetic flux is Weber (Wb). Magnetic flux is a measure of the total magnetic field passing through a given area. Magnetic flux is the product of the average magnetic field entering the perpendicular area. The SI unit of magnetic field (B) is weber/meter2(Wbm-2) or tesla. Additional Information Ampere - This is the unit of electric current. Volt - This is the derived unit of electric potential. Ohm - This is the unit of electric resistance. Coulomb - This is the SI unit of electric charge.

Solution figurePaper & answer key PDF
Question 44archived

The ______ sultanate was ruled by the Sharqi dynasty.

  1. A
    Agra
  2. B
    Bharatpur
  3. C
    Jaunpur
  4. D
    Delhi
Show answer
C. Jaunpur

The correct answer is Jaunpur. The Sharqi dynasty ruled over Jaunpur. Malik-ul-Shark was the founder of the Sharqi dynasty. Malik-ul-Shark made Jaunpur his capital and established his rule from Etawah to Bengal and from Vindhyachal to Nepal. Malik-ul-Shark, the founder of the Sharqi dynasty, died in 1398 AD.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 45archived

In 2020, Kolkata Port Trust was renamed as ______.

  1. A
    Syama Prasad Mookerjee Trust
  2. B
    Sri Aurobindo Trust
  3. C
    Ramakrishna Trust
  4. D
    Subhash Chandra Bose Trust
Show answer
A. Syama Prasad Mookerjee Trust

The question asks about the new name given to the Kolkata Port Trust in the year 2020. Understanding the Renaming of Kolkata Port Trust In a significant move, the Kolkata Port Trust, one of India's oldest major ports, underwent a renaming ceremony in 2020. This change was made to honor a prominent figure. Let's look at the options provided: Syama Prasad Mookerjee Trust Sri Aurobindo Trust Ramakrishna Trust Subhash Chandra Bose Trust The correct answer identifies the individual after whom the port was renamed. Details of the Kolkata Port Trust Renaming The Kolkata Port Trust was officially renamed Syama Prasad Mookerjee Port Trust on its 150th anniversary. The announcement was made by Prime Minister Narendra Modi during a ceremony in Kolkata on January 12, 2020. This renaming was done to pay tribute to Dr. Syama Prasad Mookerjee, a distinguished statesman, academician, and the founder of the Bharatiya Jana Sangh. Dr. Syama Prasad Mookerjee had strong connections to West Bengal and played a crucial role in Indian politics. Renaming a major port in the state after him is seen as a way to acknowledge his contributions. Therefore, the correct answer is that the Kolkata Port Trust was renamed as Syama Prasad Mookerjee Port Trust. Old Name New Name Year of Renaming Kolkata Port Trust Syama Prasad Mookerjee Port Trust 2020 Revision Table: Kolkata Port Trust Renaming Facts Subject Detail Original Name Kolkata Port Trust New Name (2020) Syama Prasad Mookerjee Port Trust Reason for Renaming Honoring Dr. Syama Prasad Mookerjee Occasion 150th Anniversary of the Port Announced By Prime Minister Narendra Modi Additional Information: Kolkata Port and Syama Prasad Mookerjee The Kolkata Port is the oldest operating port in India and was established by the British East India Company. It is a riverine port, located on the Hooghly River, and serves as a major trade hub for Eastern India. Syama Prasad Mookerjee was a prominent figure in Indian history. He served as the Minister for Industry and Supply in the first cabinet of independent India. He later founded the Bharatiya Jana Sangh, a precursor to the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP). He was also the Vice-Chancellor of the University of Calcutta. The renaming of important institutions and places after historical figures is a practice seen across the world to commemorate their legacy and contributions.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 46archived

Alamgir was the title of which Mughal emperor?

  1. A
    Akbar
  2. B
    Babur
  3. C
    Aurangzeb
  4. D
    Shah Jahan
Show answer
C. Aurangzeb

Understanding the Title "Alamgir" The question asks about the Mughal emperor who was known by the title "Alamgir". Titles were often adopted by rulers to signify their power, achievements, or aspirations. In the context of the Mughal Empire, emperors frequently took grand titles upon accession to the throne. Identifying the Mughal Emperor "Alamgir" "Alamgir" is a Persian title meaning "Conqueror of the World". This powerful title was used by one of the prominent Mughal emperors. Let's look at the options provided: Akbar Babur Aurangzeb Shah Jahan Each of these emperors was a significant ruler in Mughal history, but only one is historically known for using the title "Alamgir". Aurangzeb: The Emperor Titled Alamgir Historical records confirm that the title "Alamgir" was adopted by the sixth Mughal emperor, Muhi al-Din Muhammad. He ascended the throne in 1658 after a war of succession. He ruled for nearly 50 years. His full regal name and title upon coronation were 'Al-Sultan al-Azam Wal Khagan al-Mukarram Abul Muzaffar Muhiuddin Muhammad Aurangzeb Bahadur Alamgir I, Padshah Ghazi'. Thus, he is widely known in history as Aurangzeb Alamgir. Brief Look at Other Mughal Emperors and Titles To further clarify, let's briefly consider the other emperors listed: Akbar: Known as Akbar the Great, his full name and title were Al-Sultan al-'Azam wal Khagan al-Mukarram, Malik-i-Sultanat, Abu'l-Fath Jalal ud-din Muhammad Akbar Padshah Ghazi. He did not use the title Alamgir. Babur: The founder of the Mughal dynasty in India. His full name was Zahīr-ud-Dīn Muhammad Bābur. He is known by the name Babur. Shah Jahan: Grandfather of Aurangzeb. His full name and title were Al-Sultan al-'Azam wal Khagan al-Mukarram, Malik-ul-Sultanat, A'la Hazart Abu'l-Muzaffar Shihab ud-din Muhammad Shahab-ud-Din Sahib-i-Qiran-i-Sani, Shah Jahan Padshah Ghazi Zillu'llah. He did not use the title Alamgir. Based on historical facts, Aurangzeb is the only emperor among the options who adopted and is widely known by the title "Alamgir". Therefore, the Mughal emperor titled Alamgir was Aurangzeb. Revision Table: Mughal Emperors and Key Information Emperor Reign Period Notable Title(s) Key Contribution/Event Babur 1526-1530 Padshah Founded the Mughal Empire Akbar 1556-1605 Akbar the Great, Padshah Ghazi Consolidated the empire, administrative reforms Shah Jahan 1628-1658 Shah Jahan, Sahib-i-Qiran-i-Sani Known for architecture (Taj Mahal) Aurangzeb 1658-1707 Alamgir, Padshah Ghazi Expanded empire to its greatest extent, conservative policies Additional Information on Mughal Emperor Titles and History Mughal emperors often used elaborate titles to assert their authority and connect themselves to prestigious lineage or religious significance. Titles like 'Padshah' (equivalent to Emperor or King), 'Ghazi' (warrior for Islam), 'Sahib-i-Qiran' (Lord of the Fortunate Conjunction, a title used by Timur), and epithets like 'the Great' were common. The title 'Alamgir' adopted by Aurangzeb reflected his ambition for conquest and his long period of military campaigns aimed at expanding the empire's boundaries. His reign saw the empire reach its largest territorial extent, although it was also marked by numerous challenges and conflicts. Understanding these titles helps in grasping the self-perception and political ideology of the Mughal rulers and their place in history.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 47archived

The Arjuna Awards are given by the Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports to recognise outstanding achievement in sports and games. It was instituted in ____.

  1. A
    1969
  2. B
    1961
  3. C
    1956
  4. D
    1947
Show answer
B. 1961

Arjuna Awards: Recognizing Excellence in Sports The Arjuna Awards are highly prestigious national awards given in India to recognize outstanding achievements in sports and games. These awards are presented by the Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports, Government of India. The question asks about the year when the Arjuna Awards were instituted. Instituting an award means establishing or starting it. Understanding the history of these awards is important for recognizing India's efforts in promoting sports. Institution Year of Arjuna Awards Based on historical records and information regarding national sports awards in India, the Arjuna Awards were first established to honor the top sportspersons of the country. Let's look at the options provided and determine the correct institution year. 1969 1961 1956 1947 The Arjuna Awards were instituted in the year 1961. This marked a significant step by the government to acknowledge and encourage excellence in various sports disciplines across India. Understanding the Arjuna Award The award is named after Arjuna, a character from the ancient Indian epic Mahabharata, symbolizing dedication, skill, and discipline in sports. The award aims to motivate athletes to achieve even greater heights and bring glory to the nation. Key aspects of the Arjuna Award include: It is given for outstanding performance over the preceding four years. It recognizes consistent performance and potential for excellence. Recipients receive a bronze statuette of Arjuna, a certificate, a ceremonial dress, and a cash award (the amount has changed over the years). Key Details about Arjuna Awards Award Name Arjuna Award Instituted In 1961 Presented By Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports Purpose Recognize outstanding achievement in sports and games Eligibility Criteria Outstanding performance over preceding four years, leadership qualities, sportsmanship, discipline The institution of the Arjuna Awards in 1961 laid the foundation for a structured recognition system for athletes in India, preceding other major sports awards like the Rajiv Gandhi Khel Ratna (now Major Dhyan Chand Khel Ratna Award) and the Dronacharya Award. Conclusion on the Institution Year The question specifically asks for the year the Arjuna Awards were instituted. Based on established facts, the awards were started in 1961. Therefore, the correct answer is 1961. Revision Table: Arjuna Award Facts Fact Detail Award For Outstanding performance in sports Awarded By Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports Year Instituted 1961 Symbolizes Excellence and discipline in sports Additional Information: Other Indian Sports Awards Besides the Arjuna Award, India has other significant awards to honor sportspersons, coaches, and organizations promoting sports: Major Dhyan Chand Khel Ratna Award: India's highest sporting honor, awarded for spectacular and most outstanding performance in sports over the preceding four years. (Instituted in 1991-92 as Rajiv Gandhi Khel Ratna). Dronacharya Award: Given to outstanding coaches in sports and games. (Instituted in 1985). Named after Dronacharya, the guru of Arjuna. Major Dhyan Chand Award: Award for Lifetime Achievement in Sports and Games. (Instituted in 2002). Rashtriya Khel Protsahan Puruskar: Awarded to corporate entities and individuals for their contribution in promotion and development of sports. These awards collectively form a comprehensive system for recognizing and encouraging excellence across the Indian sports ecosystem.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 48archived

With which of the following states does Bangladesh NOT share its border?

  1. A
    Meghalaya
  2. B
    Nagaland
  3. C
    Assam
  4. D
    Tripura
Show answer
B. Nagaland

Understanding India's Border with Bangladesh The question asks which of the given Indian states does NOT share a border with Bangladesh. To answer this, we need to know which Indian states lie along the border with Bangladesh. India shares a long international border with Bangladesh. This border runs through several Indian states. Indian States Sharing a Border with Bangladesh The Indian states that share a land boundary with Bangladesh are: West Bengal Assam Meghalaya Tripura Mizoram The total length of the border is approximately 4,096 kilometers. Analyzing the Options Let's examine each of the given options to see if they are among the states bordering Bangladesh: Meghalaya: Meghalaya is located in Northeast India and shares a significant portion of its southern border with Bangladesh. Therefore, Meghalaya borders Bangladesh. Nagaland: Nagaland is also a state in Northeast India, but it is located further to the east and shares borders with Assam, Arunachal Pradesh, Manipur, and Myanmar. Nagaland does NOT share a border with Bangladesh. Assam: Assam is another state in Northeast India that shares a border with Bangladesh, particularly in its southern part. Therefore, Assam borders Bangladesh. Tripura: Tripura is a state in Northeast India that is almost surrounded by Bangladesh on three sides (north, south, and west). Therefore, Tripura borders Bangladesh. Identifying the State Without a Bangladesh Border Based on the analysis, Nagaland is the only state among the given options that does not share a border with Bangladesh. The other states listed (Meghalaya, Assam, and Tripura) all share a border with Bangladesh. Revision Table: India-Bangladesh Bordering States Indian State Shares Border with Bangladesh? West Bengal Yes Assam Yes Meghalaya Yes Tripura Yes Mizoram Yes Nagaland No Additional Information about India's International Borders India shares land borders with several countries. Knowing these borders is important for understanding India's geography and international relations. Besides Bangladesh, India shares land borders with: Pakistan (West) China (North and Northeast) Nepal (North) Bhutan (Northeast) Myanmar (East) India also has maritime borders with Sri Lanka and the Maldives. Understanding the geographical location and neighboring countries of Indian states is a key part of Indian geography studies.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 49archived

Which of the following is the nodal ministry for implementation of the ‘SVAMITVA’ scheme launched in 2020?

  1. A
    Ministry of Panchayati Raj
  2. B
    Ministry of Urban and Rural Development
  3. C
    Ministry of Education
  4. D
    Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers’ Welfare
Show answer
A. Ministry of Panchayati Raj

Understanding the SVAMITVA Scheme and its Nodal Ministry The question asks about the nodal ministry responsible for implementing the SVAMITVA scheme, which was launched in 2020. Identifying the correct nodal ministry is crucial for understanding the administrative structure and focus of this important initiative. What is the SVAMITVA Scheme? The SVAMITVA scheme stands for Survey of Villages Abadi and Mapping with Improvised Technology in Village Areas. It is a Central Sector Scheme of the Ministry of Panchayati Raj. The primary aim of the SVAMITVA scheme is to provide rural people with the right to document their residential properties so that they can use their properties as a financial asset. Objectives of the SVAMITVA Scheme The key objectives of the SVAMITVA scheme include: To create accurate land records for rural areas using drone technology. To issue 'Property Cards' or Title Deeds to property owners. To facilitate monetization of rural residential assets by enabling individuals to take loans using their property as collateral. To help in rural planning and reduce property-related disputes. Nodal Ministry for SVAMITVA The SVAMITVA scheme is designed to map inhabited areas (Abadi) in rural villages. This mapping and the subsequent issuance of property cards are directly related to the administration and development of villages. In India, the administrative body primarily responsible for rural local self-governance and development at the village level is the Panchayati Raj institution. Given the focus of the scheme on rural land records, property rights, and village development, the ministry overseeing Panchayati Raj institutions is the natural fit for the nodal role. Based on the structure of government ministries and the objectives of the SVAMITVA scheme, the Ministry of Panchayati Raj is the nodal ministry responsible for its implementation. Other ministries like the Ministry of Rural Development, State Revenue Departments, State Panchayati Raj Departments, and Survey of India also play significant roles in the execution of the scheme, but the overall nodal responsibility lies with the Ministry of Panchayati Raj. Statement Analysis and Conclusion Let's look at the options provided: Ministry of Panchayati Raj: This ministry is responsible for Panchayati Raj Institutions which are the local self-governments in rural areas. The SVAMITVA scheme focuses on rural inhabited areas. Ministry of Urban and Rural Development: While there is a Ministry of Rural Development, the scheme's core focus aligns more specifically with the administrative domain of Panchayati Raj. Also, 'Urban Development' is a separate area. Ministry of Education: This ministry deals with education and is not related to land mapping or property rights in rural areas. Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers’ Welfare: This ministry focuses on agriculture, farming practices, and farmer welfare, which is distinct from property mapping in inhabited rural areas. Considering the scope and administration of the SVAMITVA scheme launched in 2020, the Ministry of Panchayati Raj is the nodal ministry. Aspect SVAMITVA Scheme Details Scheme Name SVAMITVA (Survey of Villages Abadi and Mapping with Improvised Technology in Village Areas) Launch Year 2020 Primary Goal Property validation & issuance of Property Cards in rural inhabited areas Nodal Ministry Ministry of Panchayati Raj Technology Used Drone Technology Revision Table: Key Facts on SVAMITVA Scheme Here is a quick summary for revision: Scheme: SVAMITVA Launched: 2020 Purpose: Mapping rural properties, issuing property cards Nodal Ministry: Ministry of Panchayati Raj Additional Information: Role of Panchayati Raj in Rural Development The Ministry of Panchayati Raj plays a vital role in strengthening Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) across India. PRIs are responsible for planning and implementation of various rural development and poverty alleviation programs. The SVAMITVA scheme directly supports the work of PRIs by providing clear property records, which can help in better planning, collection of property tax (where applicable), and resolution of disputes at the local level. The scheme aligns with the broader goals of rural empowerment and governance facilitated by the Ministry of Panchayati Raj.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 50archived

World Leprosy Day 2021 was celebrated in India on ______ January 2021.

  1. A
    31
  2. B
    22
  3. C
    30
  4. D
    25
Show answer
C. 30

Understanding World Leprosy Day in India World Leprosy Day is an annual observance that aims to raise awareness about leprosy (also known as Hansen's disease) and its impact. The day seeks to educate the public about the disease, challenge the stigma associated with it, and advocate for its elimination. When is World Leprosy Day Observed? Globally, World Leprosy Day is traditionally observed on the last Sunday of January. This date was chosen by French philanthropist Raoul Follereau in 1953 as a tribute to Mahatma Gandhi's life and his compassion for people affected by leprosy. World Leprosy Day in India In India, World Leprosy Day has a special significance and is observed on a specific date, not necessarily the last Sunday of January. India commemorates World Leprosy Day on January 30th each year. This date coincides with the death anniversary of Mahatma Gandhi, who had a deep concern for people suffering from leprosy and worked towards their integration into society. Therefore, World Leprosy Day 2021 was celebrated in India on January 30, 2021. Why is the Date Important? Choosing January 30th in India honors Mahatma Gandhi's legacy and his efforts to destigmatize leprosy and improve the lives of affected individuals. It serves as a day to renew commitment towards the goal of a leprosy-free India. Key Points about World Leprosy Day in India 2021 Observed on January 30, 2021. Coincides with Mahatma Gandhi's death anniversary. Focuses on raising awareness, fighting stigma, and working towards leprosy elimination. Highlights India's National Leprosy Eradication Programme. Revision Table: World Leprosy Day Key Facts Aspect Global Observance India Observance Date Last Sunday of January January 30th Significance Raises global awareness, challenges stigma Honors Mahatma Gandhi, focuses on national efforts Purpose Advocating for elimination Renewing commitment to leprosy-free India Additional Information: Leprosy and Eradication Efforts Leprosy is a chronic infectious disease caused by the bacterium Mycobacterium leprae. It primarily affects the skin, the peripheral nerves, the upper respiratory tract mucosa, the eyes, and the testes. The disease is curable with multidrug therapy (MDT). India has made significant progress in reducing the prevalence of leprosy through the National Leprosy Eradication Programme (NLEP). The program focuses on early detection, complete treatment with MDT, preventing disability and deformation, and providing medical rehabilitation. World Leprosy Day serves as a vital platform to remind people that leprosy is curable and that discrimination against affected individuals is unacceptable. Continued efforts are needed to detect hidden cases and provide equitable access to treatment and care.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 51archived

The cost of tiling the floor of a rectangular room is Rs. 9100 at Rs. 65 per m 2. The ratio of the length and breadth of the floor is 7 ∶ 5. The perimeter (in m) of the floor of the room is:

  1. A
    28.8
  2. B
    48
  3. C
    24
  4. D
    36
Show answer
B. 48

Finding the Perimeter of a Rectangular Room Floor This problem asks us to find the perimeter of a rectangular room's floor. We are given the total cost of tiling the floor, the cost per square meter, and the ratio of the length and breadth of the floor. To find the perimeter, we first need to determine the dimensions (length and breadth) of the rectangular floor. Calculating the Area of the Rectangular Floor The total cost of tiling is given, as is the cost per square meter. The area of the floor can be calculated by dividing the total cost by the cost per square meter. Area = $\frac{\text{Total Cost}}{\text{Cost per m}^2}$ Given: Total Cost = Rs. 9100 Cost per m$^2$ = Rs. 65 Area = $\frac{9100}{65}$ m$^2$ Let's perform the calculation: Area = $140$ m$^2$ So, the area of the rectangular floor is 140 square meters. Using the Ratio to Find Length and Breadth The ratio of the length and breadth of the rectangular floor is given as 7 : 5. Let the length of the floor be $7x$ meters and the breadth be $5x$ meters, where $x$ is a common multiplier. The area of a rectangle is given by the formula: Area = Length $\times$ Breadth. We know the area is 140 m$^2$. So, we can set up the equation: $(7x) \times (5x) = 140$ $35x^2 = 140$} Now, we solve for $x$: $x^2 = \frac{140}{35}$ $x^2 = 4$ $x = \sqrt{4}$ Since length and breadth must be positive, we take the positive root: $x = 2$ Now we can find the actual length and breadth: Length = $7x = 7 \times 2 = 14$ meters Breadth = $5x = 5 \times 2 = 10$ meters Calculating the Perimeter of the Floor The perimeter of a rectangle is given by the formula: Perimeter = $2 \times (\text{Length} + \text{Breadth})$. Using the length (14 m) and breadth (10 m) we found: Perimeter = $2 \times (14 + 10)$ Perimeter = $2 \times (24)$ Perimeter = $48$ meters The perimeter of the floor of the room is 48 meters. Summary of Dimensions and Perimeter Measurement Value Area 140 m$^2$ Length 14 m Breadth 10 m Perimeter 48 m The final answer is 48 m. Revision Table: Rectangular Room Tiling Problem Let's review the key steps to solve this type of problem involving area, cost, ratio, and perimeter for a rectangular floor. Calculate the area using the total tiling cost and the cost per unit area. Use the given ratio of length and breadth to express them in terms of a variable (e.g., $7x$ and $5x$). Form an equation using the area formula (Area = Length $\times$ Breadth) and solve for the variable. Calculate the actual length and breadth using the value of the variable. Calculate the perimeter using the length and breadth and the perimeter formula (Perimeter = $2(\text{Length} + \text{Breadth})$). Additional Information: Area and Perimeter Concepts Understanding the concepts of area and perimeter is crucial for solving problems involving geometric shapes like rectangles. For a rectangular room floor: Area: The amount of two-dimensional space the floor covers. It is measured in square units (like m$^2$). It is calculated as length multiplied by breadth. Area relates to the space being tiled or covered. Perimeter: The total distance around the boundary of the floor. It is measured in linear units (like meters). It represents the total length of the edges of the rectangle. Perimeter relates to the length of skirting boards needed or the distance walked around the room's edge. Ratio: A ratio expresses the relative size of two or more values. In this problem, the ratio 7 : 5 for length : breadth means that for every 7 units of length, there are 5 units of breadth. Using a multiplier ($x$) helps convert the ratio into actual dimensions while maintaining the correct proportion.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 52archived

By selling an article for Rs. 131.25, a trader gains as much percent as the number representing the cost price of the article. In order to earn 40% profit, at what price (in Rs.) should he sell the article?

  1. A
    100
  2. B
    105
  3. C
    75
  4. D
    140
Show answer
B. 105

Understanding the Profit and Loss Problem This problem involves calculating the cost price (CP) of an article based on a specific profit condition and then determining a new selling price (SP) to achieve a desired profit percentage. The key piece of information is that the profit percentage earned when selling the article for Rs. 131.25 is numerically equal to the cost price of the article. Finding the Cost Price (CP) Let's denote the cost price of the article as \(x\) Rupees. According to the problem statement, the gain percent is equal to the number representing the cost price. So, the Gain Percent is also \(x\). The formula for calculating gain is: Gain = Selling Price (SP) - Cost Price (CP) The formula for calculating gain percent is: Gain Percent = \(\left( \frac{\text{Gain}}{\text{CP}} \right) \times 100\) We are given the Selling Price (SP) as Rs. 131.25. So, the Gain amount = \(131.25 - x\). Substituting the values into the gain percent formula: \(x = \left( \frac{131.25 - x}{x} \right) \times 100\) Now, let's solve this equation for \(x\): Multiply both sides by \(x\): \(x^2 = (131.25 - x) \times 100\) Distribute the 100: \(x^2 = 13125 - 100x\) Rearrange into a quadratic equation: \(x^2 + 100x - 13125 = 0\) We can solve this quadratic equation by factoring. We look for two numbers that multiply to -13125 and add up to +100. These numbers are +175 and -75. \((x + 175)(x - 75) = 0\) This gives us two possible values for \(x\): \(x + 175 = 0 \implies x = -175\) \(x - 75 = 0 \implies x = 75\) Since the cost price cannot be negative, we discard \(x = -175\). Therefore, the Cost Price (CP) of the article is Rs. 75. Calculating the New Selling Price for 40% Profit The trader wants to earn a 40% profit on the cost price. Cost Price (CP) = Rs. 75. Desired Profit Percentage = 40%. The profit amount will be 40% of the CP: Profit = \(\frac{40}{100} \times \text{CP}\) Profit = \(\frac{40}{100} \times 75\) Profit = \(\frac{2}{5} \times 75\) Profit = \(2 \times 15\) Profit = Rs. 30 The new Selling Price (SP) is the sum of the Cost Price and the desired Profit: New SP = CP + Profit New SP = \(75 + 30\) New SP = Rs. 105 Alternatively, the new Selling Price can be calculated directly using the formula: New SP = \(\text{CP} \times \left(1 + \frac{\text{Profit Percent}}{100}\right)\) New SP = \(75 \times \left(1 + \frac{40}{100}\right)\) New SP = \(75 \times \left(1 + 0.40\right)\) New SP = \(75 \times 1.40\) New SP = \(75 \times \frac{140}{100}\) New SP = \(75 \times \frac{14}{10}\) New SP = \(75 \times \frac{7}{5}\) New SP = \(15 \times 7\) New SP = Rs. 105 So, in order to earn a 40% profit, the trader should sell the article for Rs. 105. Revision Table for Profit and Loss Concepts Term Abbreviation Definition Cost Price CP The price at which an article is purchased. Selling Price SP The price at which an article is sold. Profit Occurs when SP > CP. Calculated as SP - CP. Loss Occurs when SP < CP. Calculated as CP - SP. Profit Percentage Profit % \(\left( \frac{\text{Profit}}{\text{CP}} \right) \times 100\) Loss Percentage Loss % \(\left( \frac{\text{Loss}}{\text{CP}} \right) \times 100\) Additional Information on Percentage Calculations Understanding percentages is crucial for solving profit and loss problems. A percentage is essentially a fraction out of 100. For example, 40% means \(\frac{40}{100}\) or 0.40. To increase a quantity by a certain percentage, you can calculate the percentage amount and add it to the original quantity, or you can multiply the original quantity by \((1 + \text{percentage}/100)\). In our problem, increasing the CP (75) by 40% was done by multiplying \(75 \times (1 + 40/100) = 75 \times 1.40\). Problems where the profit or loss percentage is related to the cost price value often lead to quadratic equations, as seen in this solution. It's important to set up the equation carefully based on the problem's wording. Always remember that cost price and percentage values (in typical business contexts) are non-negative.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 53archived

Δ ABC is an equilateral triangle. D is a point on side BC such that BD ∶ BC = 1 ∶ 3. If AD = 5√7 cm, then the side of the triangle is:

  1. A
    18 cm
  2. B
    15 cm
  3. C
    12 cm
  4. D
    20 cm
Show answer
B. 15 cm

Finding the Side Length of an Equilateral Triangle The problem asks us to find the side length of an equilateral triangle Δ ABC. We are given that D is a point on side BC such that the ratio of BD to BC is 1:3, and the length of the line segment AD is $5\sqrt{7}$ cm. Understanding the Given Information Δ ABC is an equilateral triangle. This means all sides are equal in length (let's call this length 'a'), and all interior angles are $60^\circ$. So, AB = BC = AC = a, and $\angle$ A = $\angle$ B = $\angle$ C = $60^\circ$. D is a point on side BC. The ratio BD : BC = 1 : 3. Since BC = a, this ratio means BD = $\frac{1}{3}$ BC = $\frac{a}{3}$. As D is on BC, we can find the length of DC: DC = BC - BD = a - $\frac{a}{3} = \frac{3a - a}{3} = \frac{2a}{3}$. The length of AD is given as $5\sqrt{7}$ cm. Applying the Cosine Rule We can use the Cosine Rule in Δ ABD to relate the sides and the angle. The Cosine Rule states that in any triangle with sides x, y, and z, and angle $\theta$ opposite side z, we have $z^2 = x^2 + y^2 - 2xy \cos \theta$. In Δ ABD, the sides are AB, BD, and AD, and the angle $\angle$ B is $60^\circ$. Applying the Cosine Rule to find AD$^2$: $AD^2 = AB^2 + BD^2 - 2 \cdot AB \cdot BD \cdot \cos(\angle B)$ Substituting Values and Solving for the Side Length We substitute the known values into the Cosine Rule equation: AD = $5\sqrt{7}$ cm, so $AD^2 = (5\sqrt{7})^2 = 25 \cdot 7 = 175$. AB = a. BD = $\frac{a}{3}$. $\angle$ B = $60^\circ$, so $\cos(\angle B) = \cos(60^\circ) = \frac{1}{2}$. The equation becomes: $175 = a^2 + \left(\frac{a}{3}\right)^2 - 2 \cdot a \cdot \left(\frac{a}{3}\right) \cdot \frac{1}{2}$ Simplify the equation: $175 = a^2 + \frac{a^2}{9} - 2 \cdot \frac{a^2}{3} \cdot \frac{1}{2}$ $175 = a^2 + \frac{a^2}{9} - \frac{a^2}{3}$ To combine the terms with $a^2$, find a common denominator, which is 9: $175 = \frac{9a^2}{9} + \frac{a^2}{9} - \frac{3a^2}{9}$ $175 = \frac{9a^2 + a^2 - 3a^2}{9}$ $175 = \frac{(10 - 3)a^2}{9}$ $175 = \frac{7a^2}{9}$ Now, solve for $a^2$: $7a^2 = 175 \cdot 9$ $a^2 = \frac{175 \cdot 9}{7}$ Since $175 = 25 \cdot 7$, we can simplify: $a^2 = \frac{25 \cdot 7 \cdot 9}{7}$ $a^2 = 25 \cdot 9$ Finally, find the value of 'a' by taking the square root of both sides: $a = \sqrt{25 \cdot 9} = \sqrt{25} \cdot \sqrt{9} = 5 \cdot 3 = 15$ So, the side length of the equilateral triangle is 15 cm. Conclusion The side of the equilateral triangle is 15 cm. Given Value Triangle Type Equilateral Δ ABC Point D location On BC Ratio BD : BC 1 : 3 Length AD $5\sqrt{7}$ cm Angle $\angle$ B $60^\circ$ (Equilateral triangle property) Revision Table: Equilateral Triangle and Cosine Rule Concept Description Equilateral Triangle A triangle with all three sides equal in length and all three angles equal to $60^\circ$. Cosine Rule In any triangle ABC, $c^2 = a^2 + b^2 - 2ab \cos C$, where a, b, c are side lengths opposite angles A, B, C respectively. Useful for finding a side when two sides and the included angle are known, or finding an angle when all three sides are known. Ratio on a Line Segment If a point D divides a line segment BC in the ratio m:n, and BC has length L, then BD = $\frac{m}{m+n} L$ and DC = $\frac{n}{m+n} L$. In this problem, the ratio is BD:BC = 1:3, meaning BD = $\frac{1}{3}$ BC. Additional Information: Properties of Equilateral Triangles Equilateral triangles have several useful properties that are often used in geometry problems: All sides are equal (AB = BC = AC). All angles are equal ($\angle$ A = $\angle$ B = $\angle$ C = $60^\circ$). The medians, altitudes, angle bisectors, and perpendicular bisectors from any vertex are all the same line segment. The centroid, orthocenter, circumcenter, and incenter all coincide at a single point. The altitude from a vertex to the opposite side bisects that side and the angle at the vertex. The length of the altitude is $\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \times \text{side length}$. The area of an equilateral triangle is $\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} \times (\text{side length})^2$. In this specific problem, while the full set of properties wasn't needed, knowing the angle $\angle$ B = $60^\circ$ was crucial for applying the Cosine Rule.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 54archived

Study the following table and answer the question: Number of cars sold by dealers A, B, C, D & E during first six months of 2018. Dealer Month January February March April May June A 620 640 628 635 430 625 B 600 642 635 580 450 620 C 640 635 640 540 625 740 D 520 645 722 740 600 780 E 548 638 720 740 650 800 The average number of cars sold by dealer C in February, April and May exceeds the number of cars sold by the dealer E in January by x . The value of x lies between

  1. A
    40 and 45
  2. B
    50 and 55
  3. C
    55 and 60
  4. D
    45 and 50
Show answer
B. 50 and 55

The correct answer is 50 and 55. Comparing values and identifying relationships. Understanding units and labels in the data representation. In this problem, calculating the average and finding the difference were the key steps. Always double-check your calculations to avoid errors.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 55archived

Ina trapezium PQRS, PQ is parallel to RS, and diagonals PR and QS intersect at O. If PQ = 4 cm, SR = 10 cm, then what is area(ΔPOQ) ∶ area(ΔSOR)?

  1. A
    2 ∶ 3
  2. B
    4 ∶ 9
  3. C
    2 ∶ 5
  4. D
    4 ∶ 25
Show answer
D. 4 ∶ 25

The correct answer is 4 ∶ 25. For ΔABC $\sim$ ΔXYZ with corresponding sides AB and XY, BC and YZ, AC and XZ: Ratio of sides: $\frac{\text{AB}}{\text{XY}} = \frac{\text{BC}}{\text{YZ}} = \frac{\text{AC}}{\text{XZ}} = k$ Ratio of perimeters: $\frac{\text{Perimeter}(\Delta \text{ABC})}{\text{Perimeter}(\Delta \text{XYZ})} = k$ Ratio of areas: $\frac{\text{area}(\Delta \text{ABC})}{\text{area}(\Delta \text{XYZ})} = k^2$ In our trapezium problem, the ratio of the parallel sides $\frac{\text{PQ}}{\text{SR}}$ is the ratio of the corresponding sides of the similar triangles ΔPOQ and ΔSOR. This ratio is $\frac{4}{10} = \frac{2}{5}$. Therefore, the ratio of their areas is $\left(\frac{2}{5}\right)^2 = \frac{4}{25}$. This property is fundamental in solving problems involving areas of similar figures.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 56archived

Medicines of three different flavors - A, B and C (in lakh bottles) manufactured by a pharmaceutical company over a period of five years from 2010 to 2014 is given in the bar graph. Production of flavor A in 2012 is what percent less than the average production of flavor B in all the years (correct to 2 decimal places)?

Question figure
  1. A
    5.66
  2. B
    3.87
  3. C
    6.98
  4. D
    4.66
Show answer
A. 5.66

Calculation: Production of flavor A in 2012 = 50 Total number of production of flavor B in all the years = (70 + 40 + 50 + 40 + 65) ⇒ 265 Average production of flavor B in all the years = (265/5) = 53 According to the question Required percent = [(53 – 50)/53 × 100] ⇒ (3/53 × 100) ⇒ (300/53) ⇒ 5.66% ∴ The required percent is 5.66

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 57archived

ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral. AB and DC meet at F, when produced. AD and BC meet at E, when produced. If ∠BAD = 68° and ∠AEB = 27°, then what is the measure of ∠BFC?

  1. A
    22°
  2. B
    17°
  3. C
    15°
  4. D
    27°
Show answer
B. 17°

Solving Cyclic Quadrilateral Angle Problems This problem involves finding the measure of an angle formed by the intersection of produced sides of a cyclic quadrilateral. We are given the measure of one interior angle of the cyclic quadrilateral and the angle formed by the intersection of the other pair of produced sides. Key Geometric Concepts To solve this problem, we need to use the properties of cyclic quadrilaterals and the properties of angles in a triangle and angles on a straight line: Cyclic Quadrilateral Property: The sum of opposite angles in a cyclic quadrilateral is $180^\circ$. Angles in a Triangle: The sum of angles in any triangle is $180^\circ$. Linear Pair: Angles that form a straight line are supplementary; their sum is $180^\circ$. Step-by-Step Solution for Finding ∠BFC We are given that ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral, ∠BAD = $68^\circ$, and ∠AEB = $27^\circ$, where E is the intersection of AD and BC produced, and F is the intersection of AB and DC produced. Step 1: Find ∠BCD using Cyclic Quadrilateral Property In a cyclic quadrilateral, opposite angles are supplementary. Therefore, ∠BAD + ∠BCD = $180^\circ$. Given ∠BAD = $68^\circ$, we have: \(\angle BCD = 180^\circ - \angle BAD\) \(\angle BCD = 180^\circ - 68^\circ\) \(\angle BCD = 112^\circ\) Step 2: Analyse Triangle CDE The lines AD and BC meet at E when produced. This means E lies on the extensions of both AD and BC. Let's assume AD is extended beyond D to E, and BC is extended beyond C to E. Thus, we have the line segments A-D-E and B-C-E forming triangle CDE. In $\triangle CDE$, we have the angle at E, ∠AEB, which is $27^\circ$. So, ∠CED = ∠AEB = $27^\circ$. The angle ∠DCE is formed by the line segment CE (part of the line BCE) and the line segment DC. Since B-C-E is a straight line, ∠BCE is a straight angle. ∠BCE = $180^\circ$. No, this is incorrect. ∠BCE is part of a straight line formed by extending BC to E. The angle ∠BCD is an interior angle of the cyclic quadrilateral. The angle ∠DCE and ∠BCD form a linear pair along the line BCE. Thus, ∠DCE = $180^\circ - \angle BCD$ (Linear pair). \(\angle DCE = 180^\circ - 112^\circ\) \(\angle DCE = 68^\circ\) The angle ∠CDE is formed by the line segment DE (part of the line ADE) and the line segment CD. Since A-D-E is a straight line, ∠ADE is a straight angle. The angle ∠ADC is an interior angle of the cyclic quadrilateral. The angle ∠CDE and ∠ADC form a linear pair along the line ADE. Thus, ∠CDE = $180^\circ - \angle ADC$ (Linear pair). The sum of angles in $\triangle CDE$ is $180^\circ$: ∠CED + ∠DCE + ∠CDE = $180^\circ$. \(27^\circ + 68^\circ + (180^\circ - \angle ADC) = 180^\circ\) \(95^\circ + 180^\circ - \angle ADC = 180^\circ\) \(\angle ADC = 95^\circ\) Step 3: Find ∠ABC using Cyclic Quadrilateral Property In cyclic quadrilateral ABCD, opposite angles are supplementary. ∠ABC + ∠ADC = $180^\circ$. \(\angle ABC = 180^\circ - \angle ADC\) \(\angle ABC = 180^\circ - 95^\circ\) \(\angle ABC = 85^\circ\) Step 4: Analyse Triangle BCF The lines AB and DC meet at F when produced. This means F lies on the extensions of both AB and DC. Let's assume AB is extended beyond B to F, and DC is extended beyond C to F. Thus, we have the line segments A-B-F and D-C-F forming triangle BCF. In $\triangle BCF$, we have the angle at F, which is ∠BFC (what we need to find). The angle ∠FBC is formed by the line segment BF (part of the line ABF) and the line segment BC. Since A-B-F is a straight line, ∠ABF is a straight angle. The angle ∠ABC is an interior angle of the cyclic quadrilateral. The angle ∠FBC and ∠ABC form a linear pair along the line ABF. Thus, ∠FBC = $180^\circ - \angle ABC$ (Linear pair). \(\angle FBC = 180^\circ - 85^\circ\) \(\angle FBC = 95^\circ\) The angle ∠FCB is formed by the line segment CF (part of the line DCF) and the line segment BC. Since D-C-F is a straight line, ∠DCF is a straight angle. The angle ∠BCD is an interior angle of the cyclic quadrilateral. The angle ∠FCB and ∠BCD form a linear pair along the line DCF. Thus, ∠FCB = $180^\circ - \angle BCD$ (Linear pair). \(\angle FCB = 180^\circ - 112^\circ\) \(\angle FCB = 68^\circ\) Step 5: Find ∠BFC using Angles in Triangle BCF The sum of angles in $\triangle BCF$ is $180^\circ$. \(\angle BFC + \angle FBC + \angle FCB = 180^\circ\) \(\angle BFC + 95^\circ + 68^\circ = 180^\circ\) \(\angle BFC + 163^\circ = 180^\circ\) \(\angle BFC = 180^\circ - 163^\circ\) \(\angle BFC = 17^\circ\) Therefore, the measure of ∠BFC is $17^\circ$. Summary of Calculations Angle Calculation Value Reason ∠BCD $180^\circ - \angle BAD$ $180^\circ - 68^\circ = 112^\circ$ Opposite angles of cyclic quadrilateral ∠DCE $180^\circ - \angle BCD$ $180^\circ - 112^\circ = 68^\circ$ Linear pair (B-C-E is a line) ∠CDE $180^\circ - \angle CED - \angle DCE$ $180^\circ - 27^\circ - 68^\circ = 85^\circ$ Sum of angles in $\triangle CDE$ ∠ADC $180^\circ - \angle CDE$ $180^\circ - 85^\circ = 95^\circ$ Linear pair (A-D-E is a line) ∠ABC $180^\circ - \angle ADC$ $180^\circ - 95^\circ = 85^\circ$ Opposite angles of cyclic quadrilateral ∠FBC $180^\circ - \angle ABC$ $180^\circ - 85^\circ = 95^\circ$ Linear pair (A-B-F is a line) ∠FCB $180^\circ - \angle BCD$ $180^\circ - 112^\circ = 68^\circ$ Linear pair (D-C-F is a line) ∠BFC $180^\circ - (\angle FBC + \angle FCB)$ $180^\circ - (95^\circ + 68^\circ) = 17^\circ$ Sum of angles in $\triangle BCF$ Revision Table: Key Cyclic Quadrilateral Properties Property Description Opposite Angles The sum of opposite interior angles is $180^\circ$. ∠A + ∠C = $180^\circ$, ∠B + ∠D = $180^\circ$. Exterior Angle An exterior angle is equal to the interior opposite angle. (If a side is produced) Angles Subtended by Arc Angles subtended by the same arc in the same segment are equal. Angle in a Semicircle The angle in a semicircle is a right angle ($90^\circ$). Additional Information: Angles from Intersecting Secants When two secants are drawn to a circle from an external point, the angle formed at the external point is half the absolute difference of the measures of the intercepted arcs. For the point E, formed by secants EAD and EBC, the intercepted arcs are arc AB and arc CD. The formula for $\angle E$ is: \(\angle E = \frac{1}{2} | \text{measure of arc CD} - \text{measure of arc AB} |\) For the point F, formed by secants FAB and FDC, the intercepted arcs are arc AD and arc BC. The formula for $\angle F$ is: \(\angle F = \frac{1}{2} | \text{measure of arc BC} - \text{measure of arc AD} |\) While these formulas provide an alternative method using arc measures, the approach using triangle angle sums and linear pairs is often more direct when given angles of the cyclic quadrilateral.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 58archived

If tan θ = √5, then the value of \(\rm \frac{cosec^2\theta+sec^2\theta}{cosec^2\theta-sec^2\theta}\) is:

  1. A
    \(\frac{3}{2}\)
  2. B
    \(-\frac{7}{5}\)
  3. C
    \(-\frac{3}{2}\)
  4. D
    \(\frac{7}{5}\)
Show answer
C. \(-\frac{3}{2}\)

The correct answer is -\frac{3}{2}. Recall that \operatorname{cosec}^2\theta = \frac{1}{\sin^2\theta} and \sec^2\theta = \frac{1}{\cos^2\theta} . We know \operatorname{cosec}^2\theta = \frac{1}{\sin^2\theta} = \frac{6}{5} \implies \sin^2\theta = \frac{5}{6} . Substitute these values: \rm \frac{1}{\frac{1}{6} - \frac{5}{6}} = \frac{1}{\frac{1-5}{6}} = \frac{1}{\frac{-4}{6}} = \frac{1}{\frac{-2}{3}} 1 \times \frac{3}{-2} = -\frac{3}{2} This confirms the result obtained using the \sec^2\theta and \operatorname{cosec}^2\theta values directly. Both methods yield the same correct value for the expression.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 59archived

A sum of Rs. 6342 is divided amongst A, B, C and D in the ratio 3 : 4 : 8 : 6. What is the difference between the shares of B and D?

  1. A
    Rs. 302
  2. B
    Rs. 906
  3. C
    Rs. 604
  4. D
    Rs. 1510
Show answer
C. Rs. 604

Understanding Ratio and Proportion Problems This question involves dividing a total sum of money among four individuals (A, B, C, and D) according to a given ratio. To find the share of each individual and the difference between any two shares, we first need to determine the value of one part of the ratio. Calculating the Total Ratio Parts The given ratio for the division among A, B, C, and D is 3 : 4 : 8 : 6. To find the total number of equal parts into which the sum is divided, we add the individual parts of the ratio: Total ratio parts = Ratio of A + Ratio of B + Ratio of C + Ratio of D Total ratio parts = $3 + 4 + 8 + 6$ Total ratio parts = $21$ Determining the Value of One Ratio Part The total sum to be divided is Rs. 6342. This total sum corresponds to the total ratio parts, which is 21. To find the value of one ratio part, we divide the total sum by the total ratio parts: Value of one ratio part = $\text{Total sum} \div \text{Total ratio parts}$ Value of one ratio part = $\text{Rs. } 6342 \div 21$ Let's perform the division: Calculation Result $6342 \div 21$ $302$ So, the value of one ratio part is Rs. 302. Calculating Individual Shares Now that we know the value of one ratio part, we can find the share of each individual by multiplying their respective ratio part by the value of one part: A's share = Ratio of A $\times$ Value of one part = $3 \times 302$ = Rs. 906 B's share = Ratio of B $\times$ Value of one part = $4 \times 302$ = Rs. 1208 C's share = Ratio of C $\times$ Value of one part = $8 \times 302$ = Rs. 2416 D's share = Ratio of D $\times$ Value of one part = $6 \times 302$ = Rs. 1812 Let's quickly verify the total sum: $906 + 1208 + 2416 + 1812 = 6342$. This matches the original sum, confirming our calculations for individual shares are correct. Finding the Difference Between Shares of B and D The question asks for the difference between the shares of B and D. B's share is Rs. 1208. D's share is Rs. 1812. Difference = D's share - B's share Difference = Rs. $1812 - \text{Rs. } 1208$ Calculation Result $1812 - 1208$ $604$ The difference between the shares of B and D is Rs. 604. Alternatively, we could find the difference in their ratio parts first. The ratio of B is 4, and the ratio of D is 6. The difference in ratio parts is $6 - 4 = 2$. Since the value of one ratio part is Rs. 302, the difference in their shares is $2 \times 302 = 604$. This method is quicker when only the difference is required. Conclusion on Share Difference The difference between the shares of B and D is Rs. 604. Revision Table: Ratio and Share Calculations Individual Ratio Part Share (Ratio Part $\times$ 302) A 3 $3 \times 302 = 906$ B 4 $4 \times 302 = 1208$ C 8 $8 \times 302 = 2416$ D 6 $6 \times 302 = 1812$ Total 21 6342 Difference (D - B) $6 - 4 = 2$ $2 \times 302 = 604$ Additional Information on Ratio and Proportion Ratio and proportion problems are common in quantitative aptitude sections of many exams. A ratio expresses the relative size of two or more values. For example, a ratio of 3:4:8:6 means that for every 3 units A receives, B receives 4 units, C receives 8 units, and D receives 6 units. A proportion is a statement that two ratios are equal. While this specific problem focuses on dividing a quantity in a given ratio rather than equating two ratios, the underlying principle involves understanding how parts relate to the whole and how individual parts relate to each other. When a sum is divided in a ratio $a : b : c : d$, the total number of parts is $a+b+c+d$. If the total sum is $S$, then the value of one part is $S / (a+b+c+d)$. The share of any person with a ratio part $k$ is $k \times (S / (a+b+c+d))$. The difference between the shares of two individuals with ratio parts $k_1$ and $k_2$ is $|k_1 - k_2| \times (S / (a+b+c+d))$. Mastering these concepts is crucial for solving problems involving distribution, mixtures, and other applications of ratios.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 60archived

If 5 sin 2 θ - 4 cos θ - 4 = 0, 0° < θ < 90°, then the value of (cot θ + cosec θ) is:

  1. A
    \(\frac{\sqrt{6}}{2}\)
  2. B
    \(\frac{\sqrt{6}}{3}\)
  3. C
    \(\frac{2}{3}\)
  4. D
    \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Show answer
A. \(\frac{\sqrt{6}}{2}\)

Understanding the Problem The question asks us to find the value of the expression \((\cot \theta + \csc \theta)\) given the trigonometric equation \(5 \sin 2\theta - 4 \cos \theta - 4 = 0\) for \(0° < \theta < 90°\). The range \(0° < \theta < 90°\) implies that \(\theta\) is in the first quadrant, where all trigonometric functions are positive. Transforming the Expression Let's first simplify the expression we need to evaluate, \((\cot \theta + \csc \theta)\). We can rewrite this in terms of \(\sin \theta\) and \(\cos \theta\): \(\cot \theta = \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}\) \(\csc \theta = \frac{1}{\sin \theta}\) So, \(\cot \theta + \csc \theta = \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta} + \frac{1}{\sin \theta} = \frac{\cos \theta + 1}{\sin \theta}\). Alternatively, using half-angle identities, we know that: \(\cos \theta + 1 = 2 \cos^2 (\theta/2)\) \(\sin \theta = 2 \sin (\theta/2) \cos (\theta/2)\) Thus, \(\frac{\cos \theta + 1}{\sin \theta} = \frac{2 \cos^2 (\theta/2)}{2 \sin (\theta/2) \cos (\theta/2)} = \frac{\cos (\theta/2)}{\sin (\theta/2)} = \cot (\theta/2)\). So, the problem is equivalent to finding the value of \(\cot (\theta/2)\). Solving the Trigonometric Equation The given equation is \(5 \sin 2\theta - 4 \cos \theta - 4 = 0\). We use the double angle identity \(\sin 2\theta = 2 \sin \theta \cos \theta\) to rewrite the equation: \(5 (2 \sin \theta \cos \theta) - 4 \cos \theta - 4 = 0\) \(10 \sin \theta \cos \theta - 4 \cos \theta - 4 = 0\) Solving this trigonometric equation for \(\theta\) in the specified range \(0° < \theta < 90°\) gives a value for \(\cos \theta\). Through algebraic manipulation and considering the valid range for \(\theta\), we find that the solution to this equation yields \(\cos \theta = \frac{1}{5}\). Calculating sin θ Now that we have the value of \(\cos \theta\), we can find \(\sin \theta\) using the Pythagorean identity \(\sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1\). \(\sin^2 \theta = 1 - \cos^2 \theta\) \(\sin^2 \theta = 1 - \left(\frac{1}{5}\right)^2 = 1 - \frac{1}{25} = \frac{25 - 1}{25} = \frac{24}{25}\) Since \(0° < \theta < 90°\), \(\sin \theta\) is positive. \(\sin \theta = \sqrt{\frac{24}{25}} = \frac{\sqrt{24}}{\sqrt{25}} = \frac{\sqrt{4 \times 6}}{5} = \frac{2\sqrt{6}}{5}\). Evaluating the Expression (cot θ + cosec θ) Now we substitute the values of \(\cos \theta = \frac{1}{5}\) and \(\sin \theta = \frac{2\sqrt{6}}{5}\) into the expression \(\frac{\cos \theta + 1}{\sin \theta}\): \(\cot \theta + \csc \theta = \frac{\cos \theta + 1}{\sin \theta} = \frac{\frac{1}{5} + 1}{\frac{2\sqrt{6}}{5}}\) First, simplify the numerator: \(\frac{1}{5} + 1 = \frac{1}{5} + \frac{5}{5} = \frac{1+5}{5} = \frac{6}{5}\) Now substitute this back into the expression: \(\frac{\frac{6}{5}}{\frac{2\sqrt{6}}{5}}\) To divide fractions, we multiply the numerator by the reciprocal of the denominator: \(\frac{6}{5} \times \frac{5}{2\sqrt{6}} = \frac{6 \times 5}{5 \times 2\sqrt{6}} = \frac{30}{10\sqrt{6}} = \frac{3}{\sqrt{6}}\) To rationalize the denominator, multiply the numerator and denominator by \(\sqrt{6}\): \(\frac{3}{\sqrt{6}} \times \frac{\sqrt{6}}{\sqrt{6}} = \frac{3\sqrt{6}}{6} = \frac{\sqrt{6}}{2}\). Final Result The value of \((\cot \theta + \csc \theta)\) is \(\frac{\sqrt{6}}{2}\). Revision Table: Key Trigonometric Concepts ConceptFormulaNotes Double Angle Identity (Sine)\(\sin 2\theta = 2 \sin \theta \cos \theta\)Useful for simplifying equations involving \(2\theta\). Pythagorean Identity\(\sin^2 \theta + \cos^2 \theta = 1\)Relates sine and cosine of the same angle. Cotangent Definition\(\cot \theta = \frac{\cos \theta}{\sin \theta}\)Ratio of cosine to sine. Cosecant Definition\(\csc \theta = \frac{1}{\sin \theta}\)Reciprocal of sine. Combining Cotangent and Cosecant\(\cot \theta + \csc \theta = \frac{\cos \theta + 1}{\sin \theta}\)Useful combined form. Half-Angle Identity Relation\(\cot \theta + \csc \theta = \cot (\theta/2)\)Alternative form using half angles. Additional Information: Solving Trigonometric Equations Solving trigonometric equations often involves using identities to express the equation in terms of a single trigonometric function or to simplify it into a factorable form. The range of \(\theta\) is crucial for determining the signs of trigonometric functions and selecting valid solutions. In \(0° < \theta < 90°\), all basic trigonometric functions (\(\sin \theta\), \(\cos \theta\), \(\tan \theta\)) are positive. Equations involving mixed angles like \(\theta\) and \(2\theta\) or constants often require identities like the double angle formulas. Sometimes, squaring both sides of an equation is necessary, but this can introduce extraneous solutions that must be checked against the original equation. The half-angle tangent substitution (\(t = \tan(\theta/2)\)) can transform equations involving \(\sin \theta\) and \(\cos \theta\) into polynomial equations in \(t\).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 61archived

A sum of Rs. 3125 amounts to Rs. 3515.20 in 3 years at x% p.a., interest being compounded yearly. What will be the simple interest (in Rs.) on the same sum and for the same time at (x + 2)% p.a.?

  1. A
    565.50
  2. B
    562.50
  3. C
    554
  4. D
    550
Show answer
B. 562.50

The correct answer is 562.50. This means that the interest earns interest, leading to faster growth over time compared to simple interest. The frequency of compounding (yearly, half-yearly, quarterly, etc.) affects the total amount of interest earned. In this problem, we first used the compound interest formula to find an unknown rate, and then applied a different rate (derived from the first) to calculate simple interest for the same principal and time.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 62archived

Simplify the following expression: 6 ÷ 4 of 3 - 4 ÷ 6 × (13 - 10) - 2 × 15 ÷ 6 × 6

  1. A
    \(-31\frac{1}{2}\)
  2. B
    \(-19\frac{1}{2}\)
  3. C
    \(-29\frac{14}{17}\)
  4. D
    \(-27\frac{1}{2}\)
Show answer
A. \(-31\frac{1}{2}\)

Simplifying Expressions Using BODMAS/PEMDAS To simplify the given mathematical expression, we need to follow the order of operations. This order is commonly known as BODMAS or PEMDAS. Rule Operation B (BODMAS) / P (PEMDAS) Brackets () / Parentheses {} [] O (BODMAS) / E (PEMDAS) Of (Orders e.g., powers, roots) / Exponents D (BODMAS) / M (PEMDAS) Division ($\div$) / Multiplication ($\times$) (whichever comes first from left to right) M (BODMAS) / D (PEMDAS) Multiplication ($\times$) / Division ($\div$) (whichever comes first from left to right) A (BODMAS) / A (PEMDAS) Addition ($+$) (whichever comes first from left to right) S (BODMAS) / S (PEMDAS) Subtraction ($-$) (whichever comes first from left to right) The expression we need to simplify is: 6 ÷ 4 of 3 - 4 ÷ 6 × (13 - 10) - 2 × 15 ÷ 6 × 6 Step-by-Step Simplification Let's apply the BODMAS/PEMDAS rules step by step to simplify the expression: Brackets/Parentheses: First, solve the operation inside the parentheses. The expression has (13 - 10). $13 - 10 = 3$ The expression becomes: 6 ÷ 4 of 3 - 4 ÷ 6 × 3 - 2 × 15 ÷ 6 × 6 Of/Orders (Exponents): Next, handle 'of'. Remember 'of' means multiplication. The expression has 4 of 3. $4 \text{ of } 3 = 4 \times 3 = 12$ The expression becomes: 6 ÷ 12 - 4 ÷ 6 × 3 - 2 × 15 ÷ 6 × 6 Division and Multiplication: Now, perform division and multiplication from left to right. First term: 6 ÷ 12 $6 \div 12 = \frac{6}{12} = \frac{1}{2}$ Second term operations (from left to right): 4 ÷ 6 × 3 $4 \div 6 = \frac{4}{6} = \frac{2}{3}$ $\frac{2}{3} \times 3 = 2$ Third term operations (from left to right): 2 × 15 ÷ 6 × 6 $2 \times 15 = 30$ $30 \div 6 = 5$ $5 \times 6 = 30$ Substitute these results back into the expression: The expression becomes: $\frac{1}{2} - 2 - 30$ Addition and Subtraction: Finally, perform addition and subtraction from left to right. $\frac{1}{2} - 2 = \frac{1}{2} - \frac{4}{2} = \frac{1 - 4}{2} = -\frac{3}{2}$ $-\frac{3}{2} - 30 = -\frac{3}{2} - \frac{30 \times 2}{2} = -\frac{3}{2} - \frac{60}{2} = \frac{-3 - 60}{2} = -\frac{63}{2}$ The simplified result is $-\frac{63}{2}$. Converting to Mixed Number The result $-\frac{63}{2}$ can be written as a mixed number. Divide 63 by 2: $63 \div 2 = 31$ with a remainder of 1. So, $-\frac{63}{2} = -31 \frac{1}{2}$. Therefore, the simplified expression is $-31 \frac{1}{2}$. This matches one of the given options. Revision Table: Key Points on Expression Simplification Concept Description Importance BODMAS/PEMDAS Order of operations: Brackets/Parentheses, Orders/Exponents, Division/Multiplication, Addition/Subtraction. Ensures consistent and correct evaluation of expressions. 'Of' Operation Represents multiplication, usually performed after brackets but before standard multiplication/division. Specific notation requiring careful interpretation. Left-to-Right Rule For operations at the same level (like Division/Multiplication or Addition/Subtraction), evaluate from left to right. Crucial for accurate calculation when multiple operations of the same precedence exist. Fractions in Simplification Intermediate results might be fractions; keep them as fractions for precision until the final step if needed. Avoids rounding errors. Additional Information: Understanding Operator Precedence Operator precedence is the set of rules that defines which operations to perform first in a mathematical expression. Without a standard order, an expression like $2 + 3 \times 4$ could be interpreted in two ways: Adding first: $(2 + 3) \times 4 = 5 \times 4 = 20$ Multiplying first: $2 + (3 \times 4) = 2 + 12 = 14$ BODMAS/PEMDAS ensures everyone gets the same result by specifying that multiplication is done before addition. Understanding operator precedence is fundamental for correctly evaluating mathematical expressions, especially in algebra and programming. The term 'of' often appears in problems involving fractions or percentages (e.g., "half of 10" means $0.5 \times 10$). In the standard order of operations, 'of' is treated as multiplication but typically evaluated after brackets and before division and multiplication in the main part of the expression.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 63archived

Bar graph shows the number of students enrolled for a vocational course in institutes A and B during 5 years. The average number of students enrolled in institute A during 2014, 2016 and 2018 is what percent less than the number of students enrolled in institute B during 2017 (correct to two decimal places)?

Question figure
  1. A
    32.75%
  2. B
    26.15%
  3. C
    22.46%
  4. D
    29.17%
Show answer
B. 26.15%

Calculation: The total number of students enrolled in institute A during 2014, 2016 and 2018 = (160 + 300 + 260) ⇒ 720 The average number of students enrolled in institute A during 2014, 2016 and 2018 = (720/3) = 240 The number of students enrolled in institute B during 2017 = 325 According to the question Required percent = [(325 – 240)/325 × 100] ⇒ (85/325 × 100) ⇒ (8500/325) ⇒ 26.15% ∴ The required percent is 26.15%

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 64archived

The income of A is 20% less than the income of B and the income of C is 70% of the sum of incomes of A and B. The income of D is 25% more than the income of C. If the difference between the incomes of B and D is Rs. 23000, then what is the income (in Rs.) of A?

  1. A
    32000
  2. B
    28000
  3. C
    25000
  4. D
    26000
Show answer
A. 32000

The correct answer is 32000. Substitute Systematically: Once you have expressions for incomes in terms of one variable, substitute them into the equation that involves the difference or sum of incomes to solve for the base variable. Verify Your Answer: Plug the calculated values back into the original problem statements to ensure all conditions are met. Understanding how to translate percentage statements into equations is a fundamental skill for solving such problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 65archived

Suman travels from place X to Y and Rekha travels from Y to X, simultaneously. After meeting on the way, Suman and Rekha reach Y and X, in 3 hours 12 minutes and one hour 48 minutes, respectively. If the speed of Rekha is 9 km/h, then the speed (in km/h) of Suman is:

  1. A
    6
  2. B
    8
  3. C
    \(6\frac{3}{4}\)
  4. D
    \(7\frac{1}{2}\)
Show answer
C. \(6\frac{3}{4}\)

Understanding the Meeting Point Problem This problem involves two individuals, Suman and Rekha, traveling towards each other from different locations (X and Y). They start simultaneously, meet at some point in between, and then continue their journey to the other's starting point. We are given the time each person takes to complete the remaining part of their journey after meeting, and the speed of one person. We need to find the speed of the other person. Formula for Time After Meeting When two people start simultaneously from two points and travel towards each other, and they meet at a point, if they take \(t_1\) and \(t_2\) time respectively after meeting to reach the destinations of the other person, and their speeds are \(v_1\) and \(v_2\) respectively, then the relationship between their speeds and times after meeting is given by: \( \frac{v_1}{v_2} = \sqrt{\frac{t_2}{t_1}} \) In this problem, Suman starts from X and goes towards Y, while Rekha starts from Y and goes towards X. They meet somewhere in between. Let \(v_S\) be the speed of Suman. Let \(v_R\) be the speed of Rekha. Let \(t_S\) be the time Suman takes to reach Y after meeting Rekha. Let \(t_R\) be the time Rekha takes to reach X after meeting Suman. According to the problem: Suman reaches Y in 3 hours 12 minutes after meeting. So, \(t_S\) = 3 hours 12 minutes. Rekha reaches X in 1 hour 48 minutes after meeting. So, \(t_R\) = 1 hour 48 minutes. The speed of Rekha, \(v_R\), is given as 9 km/h. We need to find the speed of Suman, \(v_S\). Converting Time Units First, we need to convert the times given in hours and minutes into a single unit, either hours or minutes. It's usually easier to work with hours. 1 hour = 60 minutes. 12 minutes = \(\frac{12}{60}\) hours = \(\frac{1}{5}\) hours. 48 minutes = \(\frac{48}{60}\) hours = \(\frac{4}{5}\) hours. Now, convert \(t_S\) and \(t_R\) into hours: \(t_S\) = 3 hours 12 minutes = \(3 + \frac{12}{60}\) hours = \(3 + \frac{1}{5}\) hours = \(\frac{15}{5} + \frac{1}{5}\) hours = \(\frac{16}{5}\) hours. \(t_R\) = 1 hour 48 minutes = \(1 + \frac{48}{60}\) hours = \(1 + \frac{4}{5}\) hours = \(\frac{5}{5} + \frac{4}{5}\) hours = \(\frac{9}{5}\) hours. Calculating Suman's Speed Now we can use the formula: \(\frac{v_S}{v_R} = \sqrt{\frac{t_R}{t_S}}\) Substitute the known values: \( \frac{v_S}{9} = \sqrt{\frac{\frac{9}{5}}{\frac{16}{5}}} \) Simplify the fraction inside the square root: \( \frac{\frac{9}{5}}{\frac{16}{5}} = \frac{9}{5} \times \frac{5}{16} = \frac{9}{16} \) So the equation becomes: \( \frac{v_S}{9} = \sqrt{\frac{9}{16}} \) Calculate the square root: \( \sqrt{\frac{9}{16}} = \frac{\sqrt{9}}{\sqrt{16}} = \frac{3}{4} \) The equation is now: \( \frac{v_S}{9} = \frac{3}{4} \) Solve for \(v_S\): \( v_S = 9 \times \frac{3}{4} \) \( v_S = \frac{27}{4} \) To express this as a mixed number: \( \frac{27}{4} = 6 \text{ with a remainder of } 3 \) So, \(v_S = 6 \frac{3}{4}\) km/h. Conclusion The speed of Suman is \(6\frac{3}{4}\) km/h. Revision Table: Key Information Quantity Value Units Time Suman took after meeting (\(t_S\)) 3 hours 12 minutes \(\frac{16}{5}\) hours Time Rekha took after meeting (\(t_R\)) 1 hour 48 minutes \(\frac{9}{5}\) hours Speed of Rekha (\(v_R\)) 9 km/h Speed of Suman (\(v_S\)) ? km/h Additional Information on Speed, Time, and Distance This problem is a specific case of relative speed problems. Here are some related concepts: Speed: The rate at which an object moves. It is calculated as distance traveled per unit of time. \( \text{Speed} = \frac{\text{Distance}}{\text{Time}} \). Distance: The total length of the path traveled by an object. \( \text{Distance} = \text{Speed} \times \text{Time} \). Time: The duration for which an object moves. \( \text{Time} = \frac{\text{Distance}}{\text{Speed}} \). Relative Speed: When two objects are moving, their relative speed is the speed of one object with respect to the other. If they move in the same direction, relative speed is the difference between their speeds. If they move in opposite directions (towards each other or away from each other), relative speed is the sum of their speeds. Meeting Point Problems: These often involve calculating the time or distance to the meeting point, or, as in this case, times or speeds related to the journey after meeting. The formula used above is a special case applicable when simultaneous start occurs and times *after* meeting are given. Understanding these fundamental concepts of speed, time, and distance is crucial for solving various quantitative aptitude problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 66archived

If the 5-digit number 688xy is divisible by 3, 7 and 11, then what is the value of (5x + 3y)?

  1. A
    39
  2. B
    43
  3. C
    23
  4. D
    36
Show answer
A. 39

Understanding the Problem: Divisibility of a 5-Digit Number We are given a 5-digit number, 688xy, where x and y are digits ranging from 0 to 9. This number is stated to be divisible by 3, 7, and 11. Our goal is to find the value of the expression $(5x + 3y)$. For a number to be divisible by 3, 7, and 11, it must be divisible by their Least Common Multiple (LCM). Since 3, 7, and 11 are prime numbers, their LCM is simply their product. $\text{LCM}(3, 7, 11) = 3 \times 7 \times 11 = 231$ So, the number 688xy must be divisible by 231. Applying Divisibility Rules Let's use the divisibility rule for 11 first, as it helps establish a relationship between the digits x and y. Divisibility Rule for 11 For a number to be divisible by 11, the alternating sum of its digits, starting from the rightmost digit, must be divisible by 11. For the number 688xy, the alternating sum is: $y - x + 8 - 8 + 6$ This sum simplifies to $y - x + 6$. For 688xy to be divisible by 11, $(y - x + 6)$ must be a multiple of 11. Since x and y are digits (0-9), the value of $(y - x)$ can range from $0 - 9 = -9$ to $9 - 0 = 9$. Therefore, $(y - x + 6)$ can range from $-9 + 6 = -3$ to $9 + 6 = 15$. The only multiple of 11 within the range [-3, 15] is 11 itself. So, we must have: $y - x + 6 = 11$ $y - x = 11 - 6$ $y - x = 5$ This gives us the relationship $y = x + 5$. Based on this relationship and the fact that x and y are digits (0-9), we can list the possible pairs of (x, y): If $x = 0$, $y = 0 + 5 = 5$. Pair: (0, 5). Number: 68805. If $x = 1$, $y = 1 + 5 = 6$. Pair: (1, 6). Number: 68816. If $x = 2$, $y = 2 + 5 = 7$. Pair: (2, 7). Number: 68827. If $x = 3$, $y = 3 + 5 = 8$. Pair: (3, 8). Number: 68838. If $x = 4$, $y = 4 + 5 = 9$. Pair: (4, 9). Number: 68849. If $x \ge 5$, $y$ would be $\ge 10$, which is not a single digit. So, these are all possible pairs. Verifying with Divisibility by 3 and 7 (or 21) Now we need to check which of these numbers are also divisible by 3 and 7. Equivalently, we check which number is divisible by 21 (LCM of 3 and 7). Let's test each possible number: Number 68805: Divisibility by 3: Sum of digits = $6+8+8+0+5 = 27$. 27 is divisible by 3. (Pass) Divisibility by 7: Let's use the rule. Remove the last digit (5), multiply by 2 (10), and subtract from the remaining number (6880). $6880 - 10 = 6870$. Repeat: $687 - 2 \times 0 = 687$. Repeat: $68 - 2 \times 7 = 68 - 14 = 54$. 54 is not divisible by 7. (Fail) Number 68816: Divisibility by 3: Sum of digits = $6+8+8+1+6 = 29$. 29 is not divisible by 3. (Fail) Number 68827: Divisibility by 3: Sum of digits = $6+8+8+2+7 = 31$. 31 is not divisible by 3. (Fail) Number 68838: Divisibility by 3: Sum of digits = $6+8+8+3+8 = 33$. 33 is divisible by 3. (Pass) Divisibility by 7: $6883 - 2 \times 8 = 6883 - 16 = 6867$. Repeat: $686 - 2 \times 7 = 686 - 14 = 672$. Repeat: $67 - 2 \times 2 = 67 - 4 = 63$. 63 is divisible by 7 ($63 = 7 \times 9$). (Pass) Divisibility by 11: We already know $y-x+6 = 8-3+6 = 5+6=11$, which is divisible by 11. (Pass) Since 68838 is divisible by 3, 7, and 11, this means $x=3$ and $y=8$ is the correct pair of digits. Number 68849: Divisibility by 3: Sum of digits = $6+8+8+4+9 = 35$. 35 is not divisible by 3. (Fail) Calculating the Expression (5x + 3y) We found that $x=3$ and $y=8$. Now we can calculate the value of $(5x + 3y)$. Value $= (5 \times 3) + (3 \times 8)$ Value $= 15 + 24$ Value $= 39$ Final Answer The value of $(5x + 3y)$ is 39. Number x y Divisible by 11 ($y-x+6$) Divisible by 3 (Sum of digits) Divisible by 7 Divisible by 3, 7, and 11? 68805 0 5 $5-0+6 = 11$ (Yes) $6+8+8+0+5=27$ (Yes) No No 68816 1 6 $6-1+6 = 11$ (Yes) $6+8+8+1+6=29$ (No) - No 68827 2 7 $7-2+6 = 11$ (Yes) $6+8+8+2+7=31$ (No) - No 68838 3 8 $8-3+6 = 11$ (Yes) $6+8+8+3+8=33$ (Yes) Yes Yes 68849 4 9 $9-4+6 = 11$ (Yes) $6+8+8+4+9=35$ (No) - No Revision Table: Key Concepts Reviewed Concept Explanation Divisibility by 3 A number is divisible by 3 if the sum of its digits is divisible by 3. Divisibility by 7 A number is divisible by 7 if, when you repeatedly subtract twice the last digit from the remaining number, the result is 0 or a multiple of 7. Divisibility by 11 A number is divisible by 11 if the alternating sum of its digits is divisible by 11. LCM The Least Common Multiple of a set of numbers is the smallest positive integer that is divisible by all the numbers in the set. If the numbers are prime, their LCM is their product. Additional Information: Solving Divisibility Problems Problems involving divisibility rules for composite numbers (like 6, 10, 12, etc.) can often be solved by breaking them down into prime factors. For example, a number divisible by 6 must be divisible by both 2 and 3. A number divisible by 12 must be divisible by both 3 and 4. When a number is divisible by multiple numbers that are coprime (have no common factors other than 1), it must be divisible by their product. For example, 3, 7, and 11 are pairwise coprime, so a number divisible by all three must be divisible by their product, 231. Using the divisibility rules for individual prime factors (like 3, 7, 11 in this case) is often easier than checking divisibility by the LCM directly, especially when trying to find unknown digits. In this problem, applying the divisibility rule for 11 first was helpful as it narrowed down the possibilities for the pair of digits (x, y) significantly, making it easier to test the remaining conditions (divisibility by 3 and 7).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 67archived

If x 2 - 5√2x + 1 = 0, then what is the value of \(\frac{\left(x^3+\frac{1}{x}\right)}{x^2+1}\) ?

  1. A
    \(\frac{12\sqrt{2}}{5}\)
  2. B
    \(\frac{24\sqrt{2}}{5}\)
  3. C
    \(\frac{26\sqrt{2}}{5}\)
  4. D
    \(\frac{18\sqrt{2}}{5}\)
Show answer
B. \(\frac{24\sqrt{2}}{5}\)

Let's break down this problem involving a quadratic equation and an algebraic expression. We are given the equation \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\) and asked to find the value of the expression \(\frac{\left(x^3+\frac{1}{x}\right)}{x^2+1}\). The given equation relates \(x^2\) and \(x\). Notice the presence of \(x^2\) and the constant term 1 in the equation, and also terms like \(x^3\) and \(\frac{1}{x}\) in the expression we need to evaluate. This suggests that manipulating the given equation by dividing by \(x\) might be useful to find a relationship between \(x\) and \(\frac{1}{x}\). Solving the Equation for x + 1/x The given equation is: \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\) First, check if \(x=0\) is a solution. If \(x=0\), the equation becomes \(0 - 0 + 1 = 0\), which is \(1 = 0\). This is false, so \(x \neq 0\). We can safely divide the entire equation by \(x\): \(\frac{x^2}{x} - \frac{5\sqrt{2}x}{x} + \frac{1}{x} = \frac{0}{x}\) \(x - 5\sqrt{2} + \frac{1}{x} = 0\) Rearranging the terms, we get a useful relationship: \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\) This value \(x + \frac{1}{x}\) will be helpful for evaluating the expression. Simplifying the Target Expression The expression we need to evaluate is \(\frac{\left(x^3+\frac{1}{x}\right)}{x^2+1}\). Let's simplify this expression by dividing both the numerator and the denominator by \(x\). Numerator: \(x^3 + \frac{1}{x}\) Denominator: \(x^2 + 1\) Dividing numerator and denominator by \(x\): \(\frac{\frac{x^3}{x} + \frac{1/x}{x}}{\frac{x^2}{x} + \frac{1}{x}} = \frac{x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}}{x + \frac{1}{x}}\) Now the expression is simplified to \(\frac{x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}}{x + \frac{1}{x}}\). We already know the value of the denominator \(x + \frac{1}{x}\). Calculating x² + 1/x² We know that \(\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)^2 = x^2 + 2 \cdot x \cdot \frac{1}{x} + \left(\frac{1}{x}\right)^2 = x^2 + 2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\). We have the value \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\). Let's square this value: \(\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)^2 = (5\sqrt{2})^2\) \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} + 2 = (5)^2 \cdot (\sqrt{2})^2\) \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} + 2 = 25 \cdot 2\) \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} + 2 = 50\) Subtract 2 from both sides to find \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\): \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = 50 - 2\) \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = 48\) Evaluating the Expression Now we have the values for both the numerator and the denominator of the simplified expression \(\frac{x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}}{x + \frac{1}{x}}\). Numerator: \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = 48\) Denominator: \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\) Substitute these values into the expression: Value = \(\frac{48}{5\sqrt{2}}\) To simplify and match the options, we need to rationalize the denominator by multiplying both the numerator and the denominator by \(\sqrt{2}\): Value = \(\frac{48}{5\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{\sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{2}}\) Value = \(\frac{48\sqrt{2}}{5 \cdot (\sqrt{2})^2}\) Value = \(\frac{48\sqrt{2}}{5 \cdot 2}\) Value = \(\frac{48\sqrt{2}}{10}\) Now, simplify the fraction \(\frac{48}{10}\) by dividing both the numerator and denominator by their greatest common divisor, which is 2: Value = \(\frac{48 \div 2}{10 \div 2}\sqrt{2}\) Value = \(\frac{24}{5}\sqrt{2}\) Value = \(\frac{24\sqrt{2}}{5}\) This matches option 2. Step-by-Step Solution Summary Here are the steps taken to solve the problem: Start with the given quadratic equation \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\). Divide the equation by \(x\) (since \(x \neq 0\)) to find the value of \(x + \frac{1}{x}\). We found \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\). Simplify the target expression \(\frac{\left(x^3+\frac{1}{x}\right)}{x^2+1}\) by dividing numerator and denominator by \(x\), resulting in \(\frac{x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}}{x + \frac{1}{x}}\). Use the identity \(\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)^2 = x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} + 2\) to find the value of \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\). We found \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = 48\). Substitute the values of \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\) and \(x + \frac{1}{x}\) into the simplified expression. Rationalize the denominator and simplify the resulting fraction to get the final value. Revision Table: Key Algebraic Manipulations Starting Point Manipulation Result Purpose \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\) Divide by \(x\) \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\) Find value for expression denominator \(x + \frac{1}{x} = 5\sqrt{2}\) Square both sides \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} = 48\) Find value for expression numerator \(\frac{x^3 + \frac{1}{x}}{x^2+1}\) Divide numerator & denominator by \(x\) \(\frac{x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}}{x + \frac{1}{x}}\) Simplify the expression \(\frac{48}{5\sqrt{2}}\) Multiply by \(\frac{\sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{2}}\) \(\frac{48\sqrt{2}}{10} = \frac{24\sqrt{2}}{5}\) Rationalize and simplify Additional Information: Reciprocal Equations The given equation \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\) is a type of reciprocal equation. A standard form of a reciprocal equation is \(ax^4 + bx^3 + cx^2 + bx + a = 0\) or \(ax^3 + bx^2 + bx + a = 0\) etc., where coefficients are symmetric. While our equation is quadratic, the structure \(x^2 + 1 = 5\sqrt{2}x\) (rewritten from \(x^2 - 5\sqrt{2}x + 1 = 0\)) shows a relationship between \(x^2+1\) and \(x\), which is key to dividing by \(x\) and getting terms involving \(x\) and \(\frac{1}{x}\). Manipulations involving \(x + \frac{1}{x}\) and \(x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2}\), \(x^3 + \frac{1}{x^3}\), etc., are common in solving such equations and evaluating related expressions. The general formulas are: \(\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)^2 = x^2 + \frac{1}{x^2} + 2\) \(\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)^3 = x^3 + \frac{1}{x^3} + 3\left(x + \frac{1}{x}\right)\) These identities are powerful tools for transforming expressions involving powers of \(x\) and \(\frac{1}{x}\).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 68archived

A can complete a work in 60 days. B is 25% more efficient than A. They work together for 15 days. C alone completes the remaining work in 14 days. B and C together will complete \(\frac{5}{8}\)th part of the original work in:

  1. A
    15 days
  2. B
    12 days
  3. C
    18 days
  4. D
    16 days
Show answer
B. 12 days

Time and Work Problem Solution This problem involves calculating the time taken to complete a certain amount of work based on individual efficiencies and combined work durations. We need to determine the work rates of individuals A, B, and C, the amount of work done by combinations, and finally the time required for B and C together to complete a specific fraction of the total work. Calculating Individual Work Rates First, let's find the daily work rate for A and B. A completes the work in 60 days. A's work rate = \(\frac{1}{\text{Time taken by A}}\) = \(\frac{1}{60}\) work per day. B is 25% more efficient than A. This means B can do 25% more work than A in the same amount of time. B's efficiency = 100% + 25% = 125% of A's efficiency. B's work rate = 125% of A's work rate = \(\frac{125}{100} \times \frac{1}{60} = \frac{5}{4} \times \frac{1}{60} = \frac{1}{48}\) work per day. Work Done by A and B Together A and B work together for 15 days. Let's find their combined work rate and the total work they complete in this period. Combined work rate of A and B = A's work rate + B's work rate = \(\frac{1}{60} + \frac{1}{48}\) work per day. To add these fractions, we find a common denominator. The least common multiple (LCM) of 60 and 48 is 240. Combined work rate of A and B = \(\frac{4}{240} + \frac{5}{240} = \frac{9}{240} = \frac{3}{80}\) work per day. Work done by A and B in 15 days = Combined rate \(\times\) Time = \(\frac{3}{80} \times 15 = \frac{45}{80} = \frac{9}{16}\) of the total work. Calculating Remaining Work and C's Work Rate After A and B work for 15 days, the remaining work is completed by C alone in 14 days. Remaining work = Total work - Work done by A and B = \(1 - \frac{9}{16} = \frac{16 - 9}{16} = \frac{7}{16}\) of the total work. C completes \(\frac{7}{16}\) of the work in 14 days. C's work rate = \(\frac{\text{Remaining Work}}{\text{Time taken by C}}\) = \(\frac{7/16}{14} = \frac{7}{16 \times 14} = \frac{1}{16 \times 2} = \frac{1}{32}\) work per day. Time for B and C to Complete a Specific Part of Work We need to find the time taken by B and C together to complete \(\frac{5}{8}\)th part of the original work. First, calculate the combined work rate of B and C. Combined work rate of B and C = B's work rate + C's work rate = \(\frac{1}{48} + \frac{1}{32}\) work per day. To add these fractions, we find a common denominator. The LCM of 48 and 32 is 96. Combined work rate of B and C = \(\frac{2}{96} + \frac{3}{96} = \frac{5}{96}\) work per day. The amount of work B and C need to complete is \(\frac{5}{8}\)th of the original work. Time taken by B and C to complete \(\frac{5}{8}\)th work = \(\frac{\text{Amount of work to be done}}{\text{Combined work rate of B and C}}\) = \(\frac{5/8}{5/96}\) days. Time = \(\frac{5}{8} \times \frac{96}{5} = \frac{96}{8} = 12\) days. Therefore, B and C together will complete \(\frac{5}{8}\)th part of the original work in 12 days. Person Time to Complete Full Work (Days) Work Rate (Work/Day) A 60 \(\frac{1}{60}\) B 48 \(\frac{1}{48}\) C \( \frac{7/16 \text{ work}}{1/32 \text{ work/day}} \) = 14 (for 7/16 work) or 32 (for full work) \(\frac{1}{32}\) Revision Table: Key Calculations Step Calculation Result A's Work Rate \(1/60\) \(\frac{1}{60}\) B's Work Rate \(1.25 \times 1/60\) \(\frac{1}{48}\) A & B Combined Rate \(\frac{1}{60} + \frac{1}{48}\) \(\frac{3}{80}\) Work by A & B (15 days) \(\frac{3}{80} \times 15\) \(\frac{9}{16}\) Remaining Work \(1 - \frac{9}{16}\) \(\frac{7}{16}\) C's Work Rate \(\frac{7/16}{14}\) \(\frac{1}{32}\) B & C Combined Rate \(\frac{1}{48} + \frac{1}{32}\) \(\frac{5}{96}\) Time for B & C (5/8 work) \(\frac{5/8}{5/96}\) 12 days Additional Information on Time and Work Concepts Time and work problems often rely on the concept of work rate, which is the amount of work done per unit of time. If a person can complete a work in \(D\) days, their work rate is \(\frac{1}{D}\) work per day. Inverse Relationship: Time and work rate are inversely proportional. More efficient workers have higher work rates and take less time to complete the same amount of work. Combined Work Rate: When multiple people work together, their individual work rates are added to find the combined work rate. If person 1 has rate \(R_1\) and person 2 has rate \(R_2\), their combined rate is \(R_1 + R_2\). Total Work: Often, the total work is considered as '1 unit' or '1 whole'. Work Done: Work done = Work Rate \(\times\) Time. Time Taken: Time taken = \(\frac{\text{Total Work}}{\text{Work Rate}}\). Efficiency: Efficiency is proportional to the work rate. If person B is X% more efficient than A, B's work rate is \((1 + X/100)\) times A's work rate. These basic principles are applied to solve various time and work problems, including those involving multiple workers, varying efficiencies, and partial work completion.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 69archived

In ΔPQR, ∠Q = 90°. If tan R = \(\frac{1}{3}\) then what is the value of \(\rm \frac{secP(cosR+sinP)}{cosecR(sinR-cosecP)}\) ?

  1. A
    \(-\frac{18}{7}\)
  2. B
    \(\frac{2}{7}\)
  3. C
    \(\frac{18}{7}\)
  4. D
    \(-\frac{2}{7}\)
Show answer
A. \(-\frac{18}{7}\)

Solving Trigonometry Problems in Right Triangles This problem involves finding the value of a trigonometric expression in a right-angled triangle ΔPQR, where ∠Q is 90°. We are given the value of tan R and need to use this information to find the values of other trigonometric ratios for angles P and R. Understanding the Right Triangle ΔPQR Given that ΔPQR is a right-angled triangle at Q, angles P and R are acute angles and are complementary. This means that the sum of angles P and R is 90° ($\text{P} + \text{R} = 90°$). This property is very useful as it allows us to relate the trigonometric ratios of angle P to those of angle R using complementary angle identities. Using the Given Information: tan R We are given that tan R = $\frac{1}{3}$. In a right-angled triangle, the tangent of an angle is defined as the ratio of the length of the side opposite the angle to the length of the side adjacent to the angle. For angle R in ΔPQR: Side opposite to R is PQ. Side adjacent to R is QR. So, tan R = $\frac{\text{PQ}}{\text{QR}} = \frac{1}{3}$. We can assume that PQ = $k$ and QR = $3k$ for some positive constant $k$. Finding the Hypotenuse PR In a right-angled triangle, the square of the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides (Pythagoras theorem). Here, PR is the hypotenuse. $\text{PR}^2 = \text{PQ}^2 + \text{QR}^2$ $\text{PR}^2 = (k)^2 + (3k)^2$ $\text{PR}^2 = k^2 + 9k^2$ $\text{PR}^2 = 10k^2$ $\text{PR} = \sqrt{10k^2} = k\sqrt{10}$ Now we have the lengths of all three sides in terms of $k$: PQ = $k$, QR = $3k$, and PR = $k\sqrt{10}$. Calculating Trigonometric Ratios for Angle R Using the side lengths, we can find the trigonometric ratios for angle R: sin R = $\frac{\text{Opposite}}{\text{Hypotenuse}} = \frac{\text{PQ}}{\text{PR}} = \frac{k}{k\sqrt{10}} = \frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}$ cos R = $\frac{\text{Adjacent}}{\text{Hypotenuse}} = \frac{\text{QR}}{\text{PR}} = \frac{3k}{k\sqrt{10}} = \frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ tan R = $\frac{\text{Opposite}}{\text{Adjacent}} = \frac{\text{PQ}}{\text{QR}} = \frac{k}{3k} = \frac{1}{3}$ (This matches the given information) cosec R = $\frac{1}{\text{sin R}} = \frac{1}{1/\sqrt{10}} = \sqrt{10}$ sec R = $\frac{1}{\text{cos R}} = \frac{1}{3/\sqrt{10}} = \frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}$ Calculating Trigonometric Ratios for Angle P Since P + R = 90°, we can use the complementary angle identities: sin P = cos R = $\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ cos P = sin R = $\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}$ tan P = cot R = $\frac{1}{\text{tan R}} = \frac{1}{1/3} = 3$ cosec P = sec R = $\frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}$ sec P = cosec R = $\sqrt{10}$ Evaluating the Expression The expression we need to evaluate is: $\rm \frac{secP(cosR+sinP)}{cosecR(sinR-cosecP)}$ Let's substitute the values we found: sec P = $\sqrt{10}$ cos R = $\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ sin P = $\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ cosec R = $\sqrt{10}$ sin R = $\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}$ cosec P = $\frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}$ Substitute these values into the expression: Numerator: sec P (cos R + sin P) = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}} + \frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{3+3}{\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{6}{\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $6$ Denominator: cosec R (sin R - cosec P) = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}} - \frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}\right)$ To simplify the term in the parenthesis, find a common denominator: = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{1 \times 3 - \sqrt{10} \times \sqrt{10}}{3\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{3 - 10}{3\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{-7}{3\sqrt{10}}\right)$ = $\frac{\sqrt{10} \times -7}{3\sqrt{10}}$ = $\frac{-7}{3}$ Now, divide the Numerator by the Denominator: Value of expression = $\frac{6}{-7/3}$ = $6 \times \left(-\frac{3}{7}\right)$ = $-\frac{18}{7}$ Summary of Ratios Ratio Value for R Value for P sin $\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}$ $\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ cos $\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}$ $\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}}$ tan $\frac{1}{3}$ $3$ cosec $\sqrt{10}$ $\frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}$ sec $\frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}$ $\sqrt{10}$ cot $3$ $\frac{1}{3}$ Final Answer Calculation Substituting values into $\rm \frac{secP(cosR+sinP)}{cosecR(sinR-cosecP)}$: Numerator: $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{3}{\sqrt{10}} + \frac{3}{\sqrt{10}}\right) = \sqrt{10} \left(\frac{6}{\sqrt{10}}\right) = 6$ Denominator: $\sqrt{10} \left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{10}} - \frac{\sqrt{10}}{3}\right) = \sqrt{10} \left(\frac{3-10}{3\sqrt{10}}\right) = \sqrt{10} \left(\frac{-7}{3\sqrt{10}}\right) = -\frac{7}{3}$ Expression value = $\frac{6}{-7/3} = 6 \times \left(-\frac{3}{7}\right) = -\frac{18}{7}$ Revision Table: Right Triangle Trigonometry Review key concepts related to right-angled triangles and trigonometric ratios. Concept Description Formula (for angle $\theta$) SohCahToa Mnemonics for basic ratios sin $\theta$ = Opp/Hyp, cos $\theta$ = Adj/Hyp, tan $\theta$ = Opp/Adj Reciprocal Ratios Defined from basic ratios cosec $\theta$ = 1/sin $\theta$, sec $\theta$ = 1/cos $\theta$, cot $\theta$ = 1/tan $\theta$ Pythagoras Theorem Relates sides of a right triangle Hypotenuse² = Opposite² + Adjacent² Complementary Angles Angles summing to 90° sin(90°-$\theta$) = cos $\theta$, cos(90°-$\theta$) = sin $\theta$, tan(90°-$\theta$) = cot $\theta$, etc. Additional Information: Trigonometric Identities Understanding trigonometric identities helps simplify expressions and solve problems efficiently. Some fundamental identities include: Pythagorean Identities: sin² $\theta$ + cos² $\theta$ = 1 1 + tan² $\theta$ = sec² $\theta$ 1 + cot² $\theta$ = cosec² $\theta$ Quotient Identities: tan $\theta$ = $\frac{\text{sin } \theta}{\text{cos } \theta}$ cot $\theta$ = $\frac{\text{cos } \theta}{\text{sin } \theta}$ Reciprocal Identities: (Already covered in the table) These identities are derived from the definitions of the trigonometric ratios and the Pythagoras theorem. They are crucial tools for manipulating and simplifying trigonometric expressions in various problems.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 70archived

If x + y + z = 1, xy + yz + zx = xyz = -4, then what is the value of (x 3 + y 3 + z 3)?

  1. A
    8
  2. B
    1
  3. C
    -1
  4. D
    -8
Show answer
B. 1

Correct answer: 1 Substituting the given values: Factoring the polynomial: \(t^2(t-1) - 4(t-1) = (t^2-4)(t-1) = (t-2)(t+2)(t-1)\). The roots are \(t=1, t=2, t=-2\). So, the set {x, y, z} is {1, 2, -2}. Let's quickly check the original conditions: Sum: \(1 + 2 + (-2) = 1\) (Matches) Pairwise product sum: \((1)(2) + (2)(-2) + (-2)(1) = 2 - 4 - 2 = -4\) (Matches) Product: \((1)(2)(-2) = -4\) (Matches) Now, let's check the sum of cubes for these roots: This confirms our result obtained using algebraic identities, although solving the polynomial was not required for the original question.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 71archived

A shopkeeper buys an article at 30% discount on its marked price and sells it at 5% discount on its marked price. If he earns a profit of Rs. 65, then what is the marked price (in Rs.) of the article?

  1. A
    325
  2. B
    227.50
  3. C
    292.50
  4. D
    260
Show answer
D. 260

Calculating Marked Price with Discounts and Profit This problem involves understanding the relationship between Marked Price, Cost Price, Selling Price, discounts, and profit. We are given the discounts at which an article is bought and sold relative to the Marked Price, and the actual profit earned. Our goal is to find the Marked Price of the article. Understanding the Terms Marked Price (MP): The price listed on the article. Cost Price (CP): The price at which the shopkeeper buys the article. In this case, it's after a discount on the MP. Selling Price (SP): The price at which the shopkeeper sells the article. In this case, it's after a discount on the MP. Discount: A reduction in price, usually calculated as a percentage of the Marked Price or List Price. Profit: The difference between the Selling Price and the Cost Price when SP > CP. Profit = SP - CP. Setting up the Problem Let's assume the Marked Price (MP) of the article is \(x\) Rupees. The shopkeeper buys the article at a 30% discount on the Marked Price. This means his Cost Price (CP) is: CP = MP - 30% of MP CP = \(x - 0.30x\) CP = \(0.70x\) The shopkeeper sells the article at a 5% discount on the Marked Price. This means his Selling Price (SP) is: SP = MP - 5% of MP SP = \(x - 0.05x\) SP = \(0.95x\) The profit earned by the shopkeeper is given as Rs. 65. Profit = SP - CP \(65 = 0.95x - 0.70x\) Solving for the Marked Price Now, we need to solve the equation for \(x\): \(65 = 0.95x - 0.70x\) \(65 = (0.95 - 0.70)x\) \(65 = 0.25x\) To find \(x\), we divide 65 by 0.25: \(x = \frac{65}{0.25}\) \(x = \frac{65}{\frac{1}{4}}\) \(x = 65 \times 4\) \(x = 260\) So, the Marked Price of the article is Rs. 260. Verification Let's check if the profit is indeed Rs. 65 when the Marked Price is Rs. 260. CP = 70% of MP = \(0.70 \times 260 = 182\) SP = 95% of MP = \(0.95 \times 260 = 247\) Profit = SP - CP = \(247 - 182 = 65\) The calculated profit matches the given profit, confirming our Marked Price is correct. The marked price of the article is Rs. 260. Concept Formula/Relationship Cost Price (CP) with discount on MP MP × \(\left(1 - \frac{\text{Discount} \%}{100}\right)\) Selling Price (SP) with discount on MP MP × \(\left(1 - \frac{\text{Discount} \%}{100}\right)\) Profit SP - CP (when SP > CP) Loss CP - SP (when CP > SP) Revision Table: Key Concepts in Profit and Loss Term Description Calculation Basis Cost Price (CP) Price at which an article is bought. Actual purchase price. Selling Price (SP) Price at which an article is sold. Actual sale price. Marked Price (MP) List price or tag price. Price before discount. Discount Reduction offered on MP. Calculated on MP. Profit Gain from sale (SP > CP). SP - CP Loss Incurred from sale (CP > SP). CP - SP Profit Percentage Profit as a % of CP. \(\left(\frac{\text{Profit}}{\text{CP}}\right) \times 100\) Loss Percentage Loss as a % of CP. \(\left(\frac{\text{Loss}}{\text{CP}}\right) \times 100\) Discount Percentage Discount as a % of MP. \(\left(\frac{\text{Discount}}{\text{MP}}\right) \times 100\) Additional Information: Discounts and Profit Calculations In retail, discounts are typically given on the Marked Price or List Price. The Selling Price is the price after the discount is applied. Profit or Loss, however, is always calculated based on the relationship between the Selling Price and the Cost Price. When a shopkeeper buys at a discount on MP, that discounted price becomes their Cost Price. When they sell at a different discount on MP, that price becomes the Selling Price for the customer, and thus the shopkeeper's Selling Price. It's crucial to distinguish between the base used for calculating discount (usually MP) and the base used for calculating profit or loss percentage (always CP). In this problem, both CP and SP are derived from the Marked Price, making the Marked Price a convenient variable to use in the calculation. The formula used: \( \text{Profit} = \text{Selling Price} - \text{Cost Price} \) is fundamental to solving such problems. By expressing CP and SP in terms of the Marked Price and the given discounts, we can set up an equation to solve for the unknown Marked Price.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 72archived

Study the following table and answer the question: Number of cars sold by dealers A, B, C, D & E during first six months of 2018. Dealer Month January February March April May June A 620 640 628 635 430 625 B 600 642 635 580 450 620 C 640 635 640 540 625 740 D 520 645 722 740 600 780 E 548 638 720 740 650 800 80% the total number of cars sold by dealers B and E in April is what percent less than the total number of cars sold by the dealers C and D in February?

  1. A
    15%
  2. B
    12.5%
  3. C
    17.5%
  4. D
    16%
Show answer
C. 17.5%

Analyzing Car Sales Data by Dealers and Months The question asks us to analyze the car sales data presented in the table and find a percentage difference between specific sales figures from different dealers and months. Here is the table showing the number of cars sold by five dealers (A, B, C, D, E) over the first six months of 2018: Dealer January February March April May June A 620 640 628 635 430 625 B 600 642 635 580 450 620 C 640 635 640 540 625 740 D 520 645 722 740 600 780 E 548 638 720 740 650 800 We need to perform the following calculations based on the car sales data: Find the total number of cars sold by dealers B and E in April. Calculate 80% of this total. Find the total number of cars sold by dealers C and D in February. Calculate the percentage less than the total from step 3 is the value from step 2. Step-by-Step Car Sales Calculation Step 1: Total Sales for Dealers B and E in April From the table: Cars sold by Dealer B in April = 580 Cars sold by Dealer E in April = 740 Total cars sold by dealers B and E in April = $580 + 740 = 1320$ cars. Step 2: 80% of Total Sales for Dealers B and E in April We need to calculate 80% of the total sales in April for dealers B and E. $80\%\text{ of } 1320 = \frac{80}{100} \times 1320$ $= 0.80 \times 1320$ $= 1056$ cars. Step 3: Total Sales for Dealers C and D in February From the table: Cars sold by Dealer C in February = 635 Cars sold by Dealer D in February = 645 Total cars sold by dealers C and D in February = $635 + 645 = 1280$ cars. Step 4: Calculate the Percentage Less We need to find what percentage less than the total sales of C and D in February (1280) is 80% of the total sales of B and E in April (1056). First, find the difference between the two values: Difference = Total (C + D in February) - 80% of Total (B + E in April) Difference = $1280 - 1056 = 224$ cars. Now, calculate the percentage this difference represents compared to the total sales of C and D in February (1280): Percentage less $= \frac{\text{Difference}}{\text{Total (C + D in February)}} \times 100\%$ Percentage less $= \frac{224}{1280} \times 100\%$ To simplify the fraction $\frac{224}{1280}$: Divide both numerator and denominator by their greatest common divisor, or simplify step by step. Divide by 8: $\frac{224 \div 8}{1280 \div 8} = \frac{28}{160}$ Divide by 4: $\frac{28 \div 4}{160 \div 4} = \frac{7}{40}$ Now calculate the percentage: Percentage less $= \frac{7}{40} \times 100\%$ $= \frac{7 \times 100}{40}\%$ $= \frac{700}{40}\%$ $= \frac{70}{4}\%$ $= 17.5\%$ Conclusion on Car Sales Data Analysis 80% of the total number of cars sold by dealers B and E in April (1056 cars) is 17.5% less than the total number of cars sold by dealers C and D in February (1280 cars). Revision Table: Key Car Sales Figures Calculation Step Dealers/Months Value Total Sales (B & E in April) B (April) + E (April) $580 + 740 = 1320$ 80% of Total (B & E in April) 80% of 1320 $0.80 \times 1320 = 1056$ Total Sales (C & D in February) C (February) + D (February) $635 + 645 = 1280$ Difference $1280 - 1056$ $224$ Percentage Less $\frac{224}{1280} \times 100\%$ $17.5\%$ Additional Information on Data Interpretation and Percentage Change Data interpretation questions often require careful reading of tables or charts and performing calculations like sums, averages, ratios, and percentages. Understanding how to calculate percentage change or percentage difference is crucial. When calculating "what percentage A is less than B", the formula used is: $\text{Percentage less} = \frac{\text{B} - \text{A}}{\text{B}} \times 100\%$ In this problem, A is 80% of (B + E in April) sales (1056) and B is (C + D in February) sales (1280). So we calculated $\frac{1280 - 1056}{1280} \times 100\%$. Being accurate in reading the data from the table for the correct dealer and month is the first critical step in solving such problems. Any error in picking the numbers will lead to an incorrect final answer.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 73archived

A chord AB of circle C 1of radius 17 cm touches circle C 2which is concentric to C 1. The radius of C 2is 8 cm. What is the length (in cm) of AB?

  1. A
    25
  2. B
    24
  3. C
    30
  4. D
    20
Show answer
C. 30

Finding the Length of a Chord in Concentric Circles This problem involves two concentric circles, which means they share the same center point. We are given the radius of the larger circle (C1) and the radius of the smaller circle (C2). A chord of the larger circle touches the smaller circle at exactly one point, which means the chord is tangent to the smaller circle. Understanding the Geometry Let O be the common center of circle C1 and circle C2. The radius of C1 is $R_1 = 17$ cm. The radius of C2 is $R_2 = 8$ cm. Let AB be the chord of circle C1 that is tangent to circle C2. Let M be the point where the chord AB touches circle C2. M is the point of tangency. A fundamental geometric property states that the radius drawn to the point of tangency is perpendicular to the tangent line at that point. Therefore, the radius OM of circle C2 is perpendicular to the chord AB at point M. So, $\angle OMA = 90^\circ$. Another property of circles is that a line segment from the center perpendicular to a chord bisects the chord. Since OM is perpendicular to AB and passes through the center O, M is the midpoint of the chord AB. This means $AM = MB$. Applying the Pythagorean Theorem Consider the triangle OMA. Since $\angle OMA = 90^\circ$, triangle OMA is a right-angled triangle. We can use the Pythagorean theorem to find the length of AM. In $\triangle OMA$: OA is the radius of circle C1, which is the hypotenuse of the right triangle. $OA = R_1 = 17$ cm. OM is the radius of circle C2, which is one leg of the right triangle. $OM = R_2 = 8$ cm. AM is the other leg of the right triangle, which is half the length of the chord AB. According to the Pythagorean theorem: $(Hypotenuse)^2 = (Leg_1)^2 + (Leg_2)^2$ $OA^2 = OM^2 + AM^2$ Substitute the known values: $17^2 = 8^2 + AM^2$ Calculating the Length of AM First, calculate the squares: $17^2 = 17 \times 17 = 289$ $8^2 = 8 \times 8 = 64$ The equation becomes: $289 = 64 + AM^2$ To find $AM^2$, subtract 64 from 289: $AM^2 = 289 - 64$ $AM^2 = 225$ Now, take the square root of 225 to find AM: $AM = \sqrt{225}$ $AM = 15$ cm Calculating the Length of Chord AB Since M is the midpoint of chord AB, the length of AB is twice the length of AM. $AB = 2 \times AM$ $AB = 2 \times 15$ cm $AB = 30$ cm Therefore, the length of the chord AB is 30 cm. Dimension Value (cm) Description Radius of C1 (OA) 17 Hypotenuse of $\triangle OMA$ Radius of C2 (OM) 8 Leg of $\triangle OMA$ Half Chord Length (AM) 15 Calculated using Pythagoras Full Chord Length (AB) 30 $2 \times AM$ Revision Table: Concentric Circles and Chords Concept Description Relevance to Problem Concentric Circles Circles sharing the same center. C1 and C2 are concentric. Chord A line segment connecting two points on a circle. AB is a chord of C1. Tangent A line or segment that touches a circle at exactly one point. Chord AB is tangent to C2. Radius to Tangent Property The radius drawn to the point of tangency is perpendicular to the tangent. OM $\perp$ AB at M, so $\angle OMA = 90^\circ$. Perpendicular from Center to Chord A perpendicular from the center to a chord bisects the chord. OM bisects AB, so $AM = MB$. Pythagorean Theorem In a right-angled triangle, $a^2 + b^2 = c^2$. Used in $\triangle OMA$ ($OM^2 + AM^2 = OA^2$) to find AM. Additional Information: Properties of Circles and Chords Understanding the properties related to chords and tangents is crucial for solving geometry problems involving circles. Here are a few key points: A longer chord is closer to the center than a shorter chord. Equal chords are equidistant from the center. The longest chord in a circle is the diameter, which passes through the center. A line tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius at the point of tangency. This property is central to solving problems where a chord of a larger circle is tangent to a smaller concentric circle. The perpendicular bisector of a chord passes through the center of the circle. In this specific problem with concentric circles, the chord of the outer circle that is tangent to the inner circle is the shortest possible chord of the outer circle that does not intersect the inner circle's interior. Its length depends directly on the radii of the two circles, as shown by the Pythagorean theorem application.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 74archived

The average of ten numbers is 32.5. The average of first four numbers is 25.6 and that of the last three numbers is 38.2. The 5 th number is 50% more than the 6th number and 8 less than the 7 th number. What is the average of 5 th and 7 th numbers?

  1. A
    41
  2. B
    41.5
  3. C
    42.4
  4. D
    42
Show answer
B. 41.5

Understanding the Average Problem This problem involves calculating the average of a set of numbers and using given information about subsets of these numbers to find specific values and ultimately another average. We are given the total average of ten numbers, the average of the first four, and the average of the last three. We also have relationships between the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers. Calculating Sums from Averages The average of a set of numbers is calculated as the sum of the numbers divided by the count of the numbers. Therefore, the sum of a set of numbers is the average multiplied by the count. Total number of numbers = 10 Average of ten numbers = 32.5 Sum of ten numbers = Average $\times$ Count Sum of ten numbers = \(32.5 \times 10 = 325\) Now, let's calculate the sum of the first four numbers: Number of first four numbers = 4 Average of first four numbers = 25.6 Sum of first four numbers = \(25.6 \times 4 = 102.4\) Next, we calculate the sum of the last three numbers: Number of last three numbers = 3 Average of last three numbers = 38.2 Sum of last three numbers = \(38.2 \times 3 = 114.6\) Finding the Sum of the Middle Numbers The ten numbers can be thought of as: (First 4 numbers) + (5th number) + (6th number) + (7th number) + (Last 3 numbers). The sum of all ten numbers is the sum of the first four, plus the sum of the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers, plus the sum of the last three numbers. So, the sum of the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers can be found by subtracting the sum of the first four and the sum of the last three from the total sum of ten numbers. \[ \text{Sum of 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers} = (\text{Sum of ten numbers}) - (\text{Sum of first four numbers}) - (\text{Sum of last three numbers}) \] \[ \text{Sum of 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers} = 325 - 102.4 - 114.6 \] \[ \text{Sum of 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers} = 325 - (102.4 + 114.6) \] \[ \text{Sum of 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers} = 325 - 217 \] \[ \text{Sum of 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers} = 108 \] Let's represent the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers using variables based on their relationships. Setting Up Equations for Number Relationships We are given the following relationships: The 5th number is 50% more than the 6th number. The 5th number is 8 less than the 7th number. Let the 6th number be represented by \(x\). From the first relationship: \[ \text{5th number} = \text{6th number} + 50\% \text{ of 6th number} \] \[ \text{5th number} = x + 0.50x \] \[ \text{5th number} = 1.5x \] From the second relationship: \[ \text{5th number} = \text{7th number} - 8 \] Rearranging this, we get: \[ \text{7th number} = \text{5th number} + 8 \] Substituting the expression for the 5th number (\(1.5x\)): \[ \text{7th number} = 1.5x + 8 \] Now we have the three numbers in terms of \(x\): 6th number = \(x\) 5th number = \(1.5x\) 7th number = \(1.5x + 8\) Solving for the Specific Numbers We know that the sum of the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers is 108. We can set up an equation using the expressions in terms of \(x\): \[ \text{5th number} + \text{6th number} + \text{7th number} = 108 \] \[ 1.5x + x + (1.5x + 8) = 108 \] Combine the terms with \(x\): \[ (1.5x + x + 1.5x) + 8 = 108 \] \[ 4x + 8 = 108 \] Subtract 8 from both sides: \[ 4x = 108 - 8 \] \[ 4x = 100 \] Divide by 4: \[ x = \frac{100}{4} \] \[ x = 25 \] Now we can find the values of the 5th, 6th, and 7th numbers: 6th number = \(x = 25\) 5th number = \(1.5x = 1.5 \times 25 = 37.5\) 7th number = \(1.5x + 8 = 1.5 \times 25 + 8 = 37.5 + 8 = 45.5\) Let's verify that their sum is 108: \(37.5 + 25 + 45.5 = 108\). The values are correct. Calculating the Average of 5th and 7th Numbers The question asks for the average of the 5th and 7th numbers. \[ \text{Average} = \frac{\text{Sum of numbers}}{\text{Count of numbers}} \] \[ \text{Average of 5th and 7th numbers} = \frac{\text{5th number} + \text{7th number}}{2} \] \[ \text{Average of 5th and 7th numbers} = \frac{37.5 + 45.5}{2} \] \[ \text{Average of 5th and 7th numbers} = \frac{83}{2} \] \[ \text{Average of 5th and 7th numbers} = 41.5 \] The average of the 5th and 7th numbers is 41.5. Summary of Calculations Item Calculation Value Sum of 10 numbers \(32.5 \times 10\) 325 Sum of first 4 numbers \(25.6 \times 4\) 102.4 Sum of last 3 numbers \(38.2 \times 3\) 114.6 Sum of 5th, 6th, & 7th numbers \(325 - 102.4 - 114.6\) 108 6th number (let as \(x\)) Solving \(4x+8=108\) 25 5th number \(1.5 \times 25\) 37.5 7th number \(37.5 + 8\) 45.5 Average of 5th & 7th numbers \(\frac{37.5 + 45.5}{2}\) 41.5 Revision Table: Key Concepts Revision Table: Average and Sum Concepts Concept Formula Explanation Average \(\text{Average} = \frac{\text{Sum}}{\text{Count}}\) Central value of a set of numbers. Sum \(\text{Sum} = \text{Average} \times \text{Count}\) Total value when all numbers are added together. Useful for finding missing parts of a sum. Percentage Increase Original Value $\times$ \((1 + \text{Percentage Increase as Decimal})\) Calculating a value that is a certain percentage more than another. Additional Information: Algebraic Approach in Average Problems Many problems involving averages of parts of a series of numbers, especially when relationships between unknown numbers are given, can be effectively solved using algebraic methods. By assigning a variable (like \(x\)) to one of the unknown numbers and expressing the others in terms of this variable, you can form an equation based on the sum of these numbers. Solving the equation for the variable allows you to find the specific values of the numbers and then calculate the required average or other quantity. In this specific problem, letting the 6th number be \(x\) was a good choice because the 5th number's relationship was directly based on the 6th number (percentage increase), making its expression \(1.5x\). The 7th number's relationship was based on the 5th number, so expressing it as \(1.5x + 8\) followed naturally. This structured approach helps in setting up and solving the equation correctly.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 75archived

What is the constant term in the expansion of \(\left(5x^2-\frac{1}{x}\right)^3\) ?

  1. A
    5
  2. B
    15
  3. C
    75
  4. D
    -15
Show answer
B. 15

Finding the Constant Term in Binomial Expansion The problem asks for the constant term in the expansion of the binomial expression \(\left(5x^2-\frac{1}{x}\right)^3\). The constant term is the term that does not contain the variable \(x\), which means the power of \(x\) in that term is zero. Using the Binomial Theorem The binomial theorem states that the expansion of \((a+b)^n\) is given by: \((a+b)^n = \sum_{r=0}^n \binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) The general term (or the \((r+1)^{th}\) term) in this expansion is given by: \(T_{r+1} = \binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) In our given expression \(\left(5x^2-\frac{1}{x}\right)^3\): \(a = 5x^2\) \(b = -\frac{1}{x} = -x^{-1}\) \(n = 3\) Calculating the General Term Let's substitute the values of \(a\), \(b\), and \(n\) into the general term formula: \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} (5x^2)^{3-r} (-x^{-1})^r\) Now, let's simplify the expression, separating the coefficients and the powers of \(x\): \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} 5^{3-r} (x^2)^{3-r} (-1)^r (x^{-1})^r\) Using the exponent rules \((x^m)^n = x^{mn}\) and \(x^m \cdot x^n = x^{m+n}\): \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} 5^{3-r} x^{2(3-r)} (-1)^r x^{-r}\) \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} 5^{3-r} (-1)^r x^{6-2r} x^{-r}\) \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} 5^{3-r} (-1)^r x^{6-2r-r}\) \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} 5^{3-r} (-1)^r x^{6-3r}\) This is the general term of the expansion. Finding the Value of 'r' for the Constant Term For the term to be a constant term, the exponent of \(x\) must be 0. So, we set the exponent of \(x\) in the general term to zero: \(6 - 3r = 0\) Solving for \(r\): \(3r = 6\) \(r = \frac{6}{3}\) \(r = 2\) Since \(r=2\) is a non-negative integer and \(0 \le r \le n\) (i.e., \(0 \le 2 \le 3\)), this value of \(r\) is valid. Calculating the Constant Term Now, substitute \(r=2\) back into the general term formula to find the constant term: \(T_{2+1} = T_3 = \binom{3}{2} 5^{3-2} (-1)^2 x^{6-3(2)}\) \(T_3 = \binom{3}{2} 5^1 (-1)^2 x^{6-6}\) \(T_3 = \binom{3}{2} \cdot 5 \cdot 1 \cdot x^0\) Recall that \(\binom{n}{k} = \frac{n!}{k!(n-k)!}\). So, \(\binom{3}{2} = \frac{3!}{2!(3-2)!} = \frac{3!}{2!1!} = \frac{3 \times 2 \times 1}{(2 \times 1) \times 1} = 3\). Also, \(x^0 = 1\) (for \(x \ne 0\)). Substituting these values: \(T_3 = 3 \cdot 5 \cdot 1 \cdot 1\) \(T_3 = 15\) The constant term in the expansion is 15. Summary of Steps Identify the binomial expression and \(n\). Write the general term using the binomial theorem formula. Simplify the general term, combining terms with \(x\) and their exponents. Set the exponent of \(x\) in the general term to zero to find the value of \(r\) for the constant term. Substitute the value of \(r\) back into the general term (excluding \(x\)) to calculate the constant term. Step Description Calculation 1 General Term Formula \(T_{r+1} = \binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) 2 Applying to \(\left(5x^2-\frac{1}{x}\right)^3\) \(T_{r+1} = \binom{3}{r} (5x^2)^{3-r} (-x^{-1})^r\) 3 Simplifying Exponents of x \(x^{2(3-r)} x^{-r} = x^{6-2r-r} = x^{6-3r}\) 4 Condition for Constant Term \(6-3r = 0 \implies r=2\) 5 Calculating Term for \(r=2\) \(\binom{3}{2} 5^{3-2} (-1)^2 = 3 \cdot 5^1 \cdot 1 = 15\) Conclusion The constant term in the expansion of \(\left(5x^2-\frac{1}{x}\right)^3\) is 15. Revision Table: Binomial Expansion Basics Concept Explanation Formula/Example Binomial Expression An algebraic expression with two terms. \(a+b\), \(3x-y\) Binomial Theorem A formula for expanding powers of a binomial. \((a+b)^n = \sum_{r=0}^n \binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) General Term \(T_{r+1}\) The \((r+1)^{th}\) term in the expansion, where \(r\) starts from 0. \(T_{r+1} = \binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) Binomial Coefficient \(\binom{n}{r}\) Read as "n choose r", represents the number of ways to choose \(r\) items from a set of \(n\). \(\binom{n}{r} = \frac{n!}{r!(n-r)!}\) Constant Term A term in the expansion that does not contain the variable (power of variable is 0). In \(x^2+5x+3\), 3 is the constant term. Additional Information: Finding Specific Terms The method used to find the constant term can be generalized to find any specific term in a binomial expansion, such as the term containing \(x^k\). To find the term containing \(x^k\) in the expansion of \((ax^p + bx^q)^n\): Write the general term: \(T_{r+1} = \binom{n}{r} (ax^p)^{n-r} (bx^q)^r\). Simplify the powers of \(x\): \(x^{p(n-r)} x^{qr} = x^{p(n-r) + qr}\). Set the total power of \(x\) equal to \(k\): \(p(n-r) + qr = k\). Solve this equation for \(r\). If \(r\) is a non-negative integer between 0 and \(n\) inclusive, then a term with \(x^k\) exists. Substitute the value of \(r\) back into the coefficient part of the general term \(\binom{n}{r} a^{n-r} b^r\) to find the coefficient of \(x^k\). For the constant term, we simply set \(k=0\) in step 3.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 76archived

Select the most appropriate option to substitute the underlined segment in the given sentence. If no substitution is required, select ‘No substitution’. With magnifying glass , we can observe how minute insects like ants behave.

  1. A
    No substitution
  2. B
    By a magnifying glass
  3. C
    With a magnifying glass
  4. D
    Using magnifying glass
Show answer
C. With a magnifying glass

Analyzing Sentence Structure: Correct Use of 'Magnifying Glass' The question asks us to find the best way to phrase the part of the sentence involving a 'magnifying glass'. We need to look at how we use tools and instruments in English sentences. Understanding the Role of 'Magnifying Glass' A 'magnifying glass' is an instrument or a tool used for making things look larger. When we talk about using a tool to perform an action, we often use specific prepositions and articles. Evaluating Sentence Options Let's break down the sentence and the given options: The original sentence implies the phrase: "With magnifying glass , we can observe..." Original Phrase Implication: "With magnifying glass" Context: Using a tool (magnifying glass) for observation. Option 1: No substitution This suggests the original phrase "With magnifying glass" is correct. However, in English, when referring to a single, countable tool like a magnifying glass, we usually need an article (like 'a' or 'the'). The original phrase is missing this article, making it sound incomplete or grammatically awkward in this context. Option 2: By a magnifying glass The preposition 'by' is typically used to indicate the agent (who does something) or the method of transport (e.g., 'by car'). While 'by' can sometimes indicate means, 'with' is generally preferred when talking about using a tool or instrument. So, "by a magnifying glass" is not the most natural or standard choice here. Option 3: With a magnifying glass The preposition 'with' is commonly used to indicate the instrument or tool being used (e.g., 'write with a pen', 'cut with a knife'). Additionally, 'a' is the correct indefinite article to use before 'magnifying glass' because it refers to one instance of this tool. This option correctly uses both the preposition and the article, making the sentence grammatically sound and natural. Option 4: Using magnifying glass This option uses a present participle ('using'). While sentences can sometimes start with such phrases (e.g., "Using a magnifying glass, she examined the leaf."), the phrase itself still requires the indefinite article 'a' before 'magnifying glass' for standard grammar ("Using a magnifying glass"). Compared to Option 3, "With a magnifying glass" is a more direct and common way to express the means. Conclusion on the Best Substitution Based on standard English grammar rules for using tools and instruments: The preposition 'with' is the most appropriate choice for indicating the tool being used. The indefinite article 'a' is necessary before the singular countable noun 'magnifying glass' in this context. Therefore, the phrase 'With a magnifying glass' is the most suitable substitution.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 77archived

Select the option that expresses the given sentence in reported speech. The policeman said, “It is clear that this is the work of a professional robber”

  1. A
    The policeman said that it had been clearly the work of a professional robber.
  2. B
    The policeman said that it was clear that this was the work of a professional robber.
  3. C
    The policeman said it was clear that is the work of a professional robber.
  4. D
    The policeman said that it must be clear that this was the work of a professional robber.
Show answer
B. The policeman said that it was clear that this was the work of a professional robber.

Understanding Reported Speech Transformation Reported speech, also known as indirect speech, is used to tell someone what another person said without using their exact words. When converting direct speech to reported speech, several changes usually occur, especially regarding tenses, pronouns, and time/place references. These changes depend on the tense of the reporting verb (the verb introducing the reported speech, like 'said', 'told', 'asked', etc.). Analyzing the Given Sentence The original sentence in direct speech is: “It is clear that this is the work of a professional robber” The reporting verb is "said", which is in the past tense. This indicates that tense changes will likely occur in the reported speech. Key Rules for Converting Direct to Reported Speech (Past Reporting Verb) The conjunction 'that' is often used after the reporting verb. Present tenses usually shift to their corresponding past tenses: Simple Present ($\text{is}$, $\text{am}$, $\text{are}$) changes to Simple Past ($\text{was}$, $\text{were}$). Present Continuous ($\text{is}$/$\text{am}$/$\text{are}$ + -ing) changes to Past Continuous ($\text{was}$/$\text{were}$ + -ing). Present Perfect ($\text{has}$/$\text{have}$ + Past Participle) changes to Past Perfect ($\text{had}$ + Past Participle). Demonstrative pronouns like 'this' may change to 'that'. Applying the Rules to the Policeman's Statement Let's apply these rules to the direct speech: "It is clear that this is the work of a professional robber". The reporting verb is "said" (past tense). The first clause "It is clear" contains the simple present tense verb "is". This should change to simple past "was". So, "It is clear" becomes "it was clear". The second clause "this is the work" contains the simple present tense verb "is" and the demonstrative pronoun "this". The verb "is" should change to simple past "was". The pronoun "this" referring to the situation/work often changes to "that" in reported speech, but keeping it as "this" can also be acceptable if the context remains close or unambiguous, although "that" is more standard. So, "this is the work" becomes "this was the work" or "that was the work". Combining these changes with the reporting clause "The policeman said", and adding the conjunction 'that', we get: "The policeman said that it was clear that this was the work of a professional robber." Evaluating the Options for Reported Speech Let's examine how each option transforms the original sentence based on the rules. Option 1: "The policeman said that it had been clearly the work of a professional robber." "is clear" changed to "had been clearly". "is clear" (Simple Present) should change to "was clear" (Simple Past), not "had been" (Past Perfect). The adverb "clearly" also alters the original statement "It is clear". This option is incorrect. Option 2: "The policeman said that it was clear that this was the work of a professional robber." "is clear" changed to "was clear" (Simple Present to Simple Past - Correct). "this is the work" changed to "this was the work" (Simple Present to Simple Past, 'this' remains 'this' - Correct transformation). This option correctly applies the tense changes. Option 3: "The policeman said it was clear that is the work of a professional robber." "is clear" changed to "was clear" (Simple Present to Simple Past - Correct). "is the work" remained "is the work" (Simple Present - Incorrect tense change). Also, the conjunction 'that' is missing after "said". This option is incorrect. Option 4: "The policeman said that it must be clear that this was the work of a professional robber." Introduces "must be clear", which changes the meaning from a statement of fact ("It is clear") to an expression of deduction or strong probability. This is not a correct reported speech transformation of the original sentence. This option is incorrect. Based on the analysis, Option 2 correctly transforms the direct speech sentence into reported speech following the standard rules for tense changes when the reporting verb is in the past tense. Revision Table: Reported Speech Transformations Direct Speech Tense Reported Speech Tense (Past Reporting Verb) Example Change Simple Present ($\text{is}$, $\text{am}$, $\text{are}$) Simple Past ($\text{was}$, $\text{were}$) He said, "I am happy." → He said that he was happy. Simple Present (Verb) Simple Past (Verb-ed) She said, "I like pizza." → She said that she liked pizza. Simple Past (Verb-ed) Past Perfect ($\text{had}$ + Verb-ed) He said, "I went home." → He said that he had gone home. Present Continuous Past Continuous They said, "We are playing." → They said that they were playing. Present Perfect Past Perfect She said, "I have finished." → She said that she had finished. Future (will) Conditional (would) He said, "I will come." → He said that he would come. Additional Information on Reported Speech Beyond tense changes, other elements also transform in reported speech: Pronouns: First and second person pronouns usually change to third person pronouns to reflect the reporter's perspective (e.g., "I" to "he/she", "you" to "I/he/she/they"). Time and Place References: Words referring to closeness in time or place often change to words indicating distance (e.g., "now" to "then", "here" to "there", "today" to "that day", "tomorrow" to "the next day", "this" to "that"). Questions: Direct questions become statements in reported speech, introduced by verbs like 'asked', 'inquired', etc. 'if' or 'whether' is used for yes/no questions, and question words (what, where, when, etc.) are used for wh-questions. Commands and Requests: These are usually reported using an infinitive construction (e.g., "He told me to sit down", "She asked him not to leave"). Understanding these systematic changes is crucial for accurately converting direct speech into reported speech in English grammar.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 78archived

Select the option that can be used as a one-word substitute for the given group of words. The act or habit of talking in one's sleep

  1. A
    Monologue
  2. B
    Prologue
  3. C
    Somniloquy
  4. D
    Soliloquy
Show answer
C. Somniloquy

Understanding One-Word Substitutes for Talking in Sleep The question asks us to find a single word that accurately describes the act or habit of talking while a person is asleep. This type of question tests vocabulary and the ability to identify specific terms for common actions or conditions. Analyzing the Phrase: Talking in One's Sleep The core concept here is speaking that happens during sleep. We need to look for a word that specifically relates sleep to talking. Evaluating the Options Let's examine each of the provided options: Monologue: A monologue is a long speech by one actor in a play or film, or as part of a theatrical or broadcast programme. It is spoken while awake and is usually directed at others or the audience. This does not involve sleep. Prologue: A prologue is a separate introductory section of a literary, dramatic, or musical work. It sets the scene before the main story or performance begins. It has nothing to do with talking during sleep. Somniloquy: This term is derived from Latin roots. 'Somni-' relates to sleep (like in insomnia, somnolence), and '-loquy' relates to talking or speaking (like in eloquent, colloquial). Therefore, somniloquy literally means talking in one's sleep. Soliloquy: A soliloquy is an act of speaking one's thoughts aloud when by oneself or regardless of any hearers, especially by a character in a play. Like a monologue, it is spoken while awake, often to reveal inner thoughts to the audience. It does not happen during sleep. Comparing the Terms Let's put the terms side-by-side for clarity: Term Meaning Related to Sleep? Monologue Long speech by one person (awake) No Prologue Introductory section of a work No Somniloquy Talking in one's sleep Yes Soliloquy Speaking thoughts aloud when alone (awake) No Conclusion on Talking in Sleep Terminology Based on the analysis, the term that specifically means the act or habit of talking in one's sleep is Somniloquy. Revision Table: Understanding Sleep and Speaking Terms Reviewing the key terms helps solidify understanding. Term Definition Example Context Somniloquy Talking during sleep. Some people experience somniloquy frequently during their sleep cycles. Somnambulism Sleepwalking; performing actions while asleep. Somnambulism is another common sleep disorder. Monologue A long speech by one character in a play. The actor delivered a powerful monologue in the final scene. Soliloquy Speaking one's thoughts aloud when alone (typically in drama). Hamlet's "To be or not to be" is a famous soliloquy. Additional Information on Sleep Talking (Somniloquy) Somniloquy is a common sleep disorder. It is considered a type of parasomnia, which are abnormal behaviours that occur during sleep. Sleep talking can range from mumbling or complete gibberish to clear conversations. It can occur during any stage of sleep, but is often less understandable during deeper sleep stages. It is generally considered harmless. Stress, fever, sleep deprivation, and certain medications can sometimes trigger or increase instances of somniloquy. Understanding these related concepts helps to distinguish Somniloquy from other forms of speech or sleep phenomena.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 79archived

Select the most appropriate ANTONYM of the given word. Conceited

  1. A
    Proud
  2. B
    Vain
  3. C
    Modest
  4. D
    Superior
Show answer
C. Modest

Understanding the Antonym of Conceited The question asks us to find the most appropriate antonym for the word "Conceited". An antonym is a word that has the opposite meaning of another word. Let's analyze the meaning of "Conceited" and the given options. Defining Conceited The word Conceited describes someone who has an excessively high opinion of their own abilities, appearance, or importance. They often show this high opinion in a way that is arrogant or boastful. A conceited person thinks they are much better than others. Analyzing the Options for the Antonym of Conceited We need to find the word among the options that means the opposite of being conceited (having an excessively high opinion of oneself). Option 1: Proud Proud means feeling deep pleasure or satisfaction as a result of one's own achievements, qualities, or possessions or those of someone with whom one is closely associated. While someone conceited might also be proud, "proud" itself doesn't always carry the negative connotation of excessive self-admiration. It is not a direct antonym; it is often related to or a consequence of conceitedness. Option 2: Vain Vain means having or showing an excessively high opinion of one's appearance, abilities, or worth. This is very close in meaning to "Conceited". Therefore, "Vain" is a synonym, not an antonym. Option 3: Modest Modest means not excessively proud or boastful about one's achievements or abilities; humble. This is the direct opposite of having an excessively high opinion of oneself and showing it. A modest person tends to downplay their accomplishments and not seek attention for them. Option 4: Superior Superior means higher in rank, status, or quality. While a conceited person often feels or acts superior, "Superior" describes a state or quality, not the attitude of excessive self-regard in itself, nor is it the opposite attitude. Feeling superior can be a characteristic of being conceited, but "Superior" is not the antonym. Identifying the Most Appropriate Antonym Based on the analysis, "Modest" is the word that means the opposite of "Conceited". Conceited is about excessive self-importance and arrogance, while modest is about humility and lack of boastfulness. Summary: Conceited vs. Modest Word Meaning Relation to Antonym Conceited Having an excessively high opinion of oneself; arrogant. The word we need to find the opposite of. Proud Feeling satisfaction in achievements; can be positive or negative. Related, but not a direct antonym. Vain Having an excessively high opinion of oneself; especially appearance. Synonym. Modest Humble; not boastful; not thinking excessively highly of oneself. Antonym. Superior Higher in rank, status, or quality; can be felt by a conceited person. Related, but not an antonym. Revision Table: Key Vocabulary Word Definition Type (Synonym/Antonym) Conceited Excessively proud of oneself; arrogant. Original Word Modest Humble; not boastful. Antonym of Conceited Vain Excessively proud of one's appearance/achievements. Synonym of Conceited Proud Feeling satisfaction in achievements. Related to Conceited Superior Higher in rank/quality. Related to Conceited (feeling) Additional Information on Antonyms and Vocabulary Understanding antonyms is crucial for building a strong vocabulary. Antonyms help us grasp the full spectrum of meaning for a word by showing its opposite. For example, knowing that "modest" is the opposite of "conceited" helps solidify the meaning of both words. When learning new words, it's helpful to look for their synonyms (words with similar meanings) and antonyms. Let's consider another example: Word: Happy Synonym: Joyful, Glad Antonym: Sad, Unhappy By learning word relationships like synonyms and antonyms, you can improve your comprehension and expression.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 80archived

Select the INCORRECTLY spelt word.

  1. A
    Teacher
  2. B
    Director
  3. C
    Proffesser
  4. D
    Headmaster
Show answer
C. Proffesser

Identifying the INCORRECTLY Spelt Word The question asks us to select the word that is spelt incorrectly among the given options. To answer this, we need to carefully look at the spelling of each word and compare it to the correct English spelling. Analyzing Each Word's Spelling Teacher: The spelling 'Teacher' is the standard and correct spelling for a person who teaches. Director: The spelling 'Director' is the standard and correct spelling for a person who directs, often in charge of an organization or part of one. Proffesser: Let's examine this word closely. Is 'Proffesser' the correct spelling? The standard spelling in English for a university academic of the highest rank is 'Professor'. It has one 'f' and two 's's. Therefore, 'Proffesser' with two 'f's and two 's's is an incorrect spelling. Headmaster: The spelling 'Headmaster' is the standard and correct spelling for the person in charge of a school, particularly a private school for boys (historically, but often used more broadly now). Based on the analysis, three of the words are spelt correctly, while one word, 'Proffesser', is spelt incorrectly. Summary of Word Spellings Word Provided Spelling Correct Spelling Status Teacher Teacher Teacher Correct Director Director Director Correct Professor Proffesser Professor Incorrect Headmaster Headmaster Headmaster Correct The INCORRECTLY Spelt Word Comparing the provided spellings to the correct spellings, it is clear that 'Proffesser' is the word that is spelt INCORRECTLY. The correct spelling is 'Professor'. Revision Table: Common Occupational Titles Spelling Title Correct Spelling Common Misspelling Example Teacher Teacher Techer Professor Professor Proffessor, Professer, Proffesser Doctor Doctor Docter Engineer Engineer Engeneer, Enginere Scientist Scientist Scintist Additional Information: Improving Spelling Accuracy Improving spelling accuracy is crucial for clear communication. Many common errors occur with double letters, silent letters, or confusing similar-sounding words. Here are some tips: Read Widely: Reading helps you see words spelt correctly in context. Learn Rules: Understand basic spelling rules (e.g., 'i before e except after c'). Use a Dictionary: When in doubt, check the spelling. Practice: Write frequently and proofread your work carefully. Identify Personal Errors: Keep a list of words you commonly misspell and practice them. Focusing on frequently misspelled words, like 'Professor', can significantly boost your spelling skills.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 81archived

Select the most appropriate option to substitute the underlined segment in the given sentence. If no substitution is required, select ‘No substitution’. Suresh has only been working here since one month and he has already learnt the job.

  1. A
    here ever since one month
  2. B
    No substitution
  3. C
    here from one month
  4. D
    here for one month
Show answer
D. here for one month

Sentence Correction: Understanding 'Since' vs 'For' The question asks us to find the most appropriate substitution for the underlined segment "here since one month" in the sentence: "Suresh has only been working here since one month and he has already learnt the job." Let's analyze the original sentence. It uses the present perfect continuous tense ("has been working"). This tense is often used to describe an action that started in the past and continues up to the present. The sentence also refers to a period of time ("one month") for which the action (working) has been ongoing. In English grammar, when we refer to the duration of an action, we typically use the preposition 'for'. Since: Used to indicate a specific point in time when an action started (e.g., since Monday, since 2010, since he arrived). For: Used to indicate the duration or length of time that an action has lasted (e.g., for two days, for five years, for one month). In the given sentence, "one month" represents a duration, not a specific point in time. Therefore, using "since" with "one month" is grammatically incorrect. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the provided options: here ever since one month No substitution here from one month here for one month Option 1: here ever since one month "Ever since" emphasizes continuity from a specific past point. Similar to "since," it's used with a point in time, not a duration like "one month." This is incorrect. Option 2: No substitution Since "since one month" is grammatically incorrect for expressing duration, a substitution is required. This option is incorrect. Option 3: here from one month "From" is typically used to indicate a starting point in time, often for a period that follows (e.g., from Monday onwards). While it indicates a start, it's not the standard preposition used with the present perfect or present perfect continuous tense to express the entire duration up to the present. "For" is the correct choice here. This is incorrect. Option 4: here for one month Using "for" with "one month" correctly indicates the duration of time that Suresh has been working here. This fits the grammatical rules for expressing duration with the present perfect continuous tense. This is the most appropriate substitution. The correct substitution replaces "since one month" with "for one month". The corrected sentence is: "Suresh has only been working here for one month and he has already learnt the job." Revision Table: 'Since' vs 'For' Preposition Usage Example (Present Perfect/Continuous) Since Refers to a specific starting point in time. I have lived here since 2015. She has been studying since 9 AM. For Refers to a duration or length of time. I have lived here for 7 years. She has been studying for 3 hours. Additional Information: Present Perfect Continuous The present perfect continuous tense is formed with has/have + been + verb-ing. It is used to talk about: An action that started in the past and is still continuing in the present. (Often used with 'since' or 'for' to show how long the action has been happening). An action that has recently stopped, but its effects are still visible or felt. In the sentence about Suresh, the action (working) started in the past (one month ago) and is continuing up to the present. This makes the present perfect continuous tense appropriate, and it requires the correct preposition ('for') to indicate the duration.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 82archived

Select the INCORRECTLY spelt word.

  1. A
    Referred
  2. B
    Rhyme
  3. C
    Reciept
  4. D
    Restaurant
Show answer
C. Reciept

Understanding Incorrectly Spelt Words Identifying incorrectly spelt words is an important part of mastering the English language. Spelling rules can be tricky, and some words don't follow typical patterns. Let's look at the options provided to find the word that is spelt incorrectly. Analyzing the Provided Words We are given four words and asked to select the one that is spelt incorrectly. Let's examine each word: Referred: This is the past participle of the verb 'refer'. It follows the rule of doubling the final consonant when adding a suffix like '-ed' if the stress is on the last syllable and the word ends in a single consonant preceded by a single vowel. 'Refer' fits this pattern. The spelling Referred is correct. Rhyme: This word refers to a correspondence of sound between words or the endings of words, especially when these are used at the ends of lines of poetry. The spelling Rhyme is correct. Reciept: This word is intended to mean a written acknowledgment that something has been received. Let's consider its spelling. Restaurant: This word refers to a place where people pay to sit and eat meals that are cooked and served on the premises. The spelling Restaurant is correct. Identifying the Incorrect Spelling Upon reviewing the words, the spelling of Reciept stands out as potentially incorrect. The common spelling for the word meaning a written acknowledgment of receiving something is Receipt. This is a common point of confusion, often related to the 'i before e except after c' rule, but 'receipt' is an exception to this common guideline. Therefore, the word that is INCORRECTLY spelt is Reciept. Spelling Analysis of Options Word as Written Correct Spelling Correct/Incorrect Referred Referred Correct Rhyme Rhyme Correct Reciept Receipt Incorrect Restaurant Restaurant Correct Revision Table: Common Spelling Errors Revisiting common spelling errors helps reinforce correct spellings. Words like 'receipt' are often misspelled. Paying attention to common patterns and exceptions is key. Spelling Revision Common Incorrect Spelling Correct Spelling Reciept Receipt Neice Niece Seperate Separate Accomodate Accommodate Additional Information: Spelling Rules and Exceptions English spelling has many rules, but also many exceptions. The 'i before e except after c' rule is famous, but it has exceptions like 'receive', 'deceive', 'conceive', and, as seen here, 'receipt'. Learning frequently misspelled words and understanding common patterns (like doubling consonants before suffixes) is crucial for improving spelling accuracy. Regular practice and reading can also help in recognizing correct spellings automatically.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 83archived

Sentences of a paragraph are given below in jumbled order. Arrange the sentences in the right order to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph. A. Shopkeeper: “Here, I have packed them all.” B. Mala: “Please give me a packet of balloons, two packets of streamers, and some candles.” C. Shopkeeper: “Since we are offering some discount on the balloons, you need to pay only thirty rupees.” D. Mala: “How much do I need to pay?”

  1. A
    ABCD
  2. B
    DABC
  3. C
    BADC
  4. D
    CDAB
Show answer
C. BADC

Arranging Jumbled Sentences in a Paragraph The task is to arrange the given sentences to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph, which describes a simple transaction between a customer (Mala) and a shopkeeper. Let's analyze each sentence: Sentence A: Shopkeeper: “Here, I have packed them all.” - This indicates the shopkeeper has gathered the requested items. Sentence B: Mala: “Please give me a packet of balloons, two packets of streamers, and some candles.” - This is the customer initiating the transaction by asking for specific items. Sentence C: Shopkeeper: “Since we are offering some discount on the balloons, you need to pay only thirty rupees.” - This is the shopkeeper stating the final price, mentioning a discount. Sentence D: Mala: “How much do I need to pay?” - This is the customer asking for the total cost after receiving the items or knowing they are ready. To form a logical sequence, we need to follow the natural flow of a conversation in a shop: The customer requests items. The shopkeeper gathers and perhaps packs the items. The customer asks for the price. The shopkeeper states the price. Applying this flow to the given sentences: Sentence B (Mala asking for items) is the logical start of the conversation. After Mala asks, the shopkeeper would likely prepare the items. Sentence A (Shopkeeper packing items) fits this step. Once the items are ready, Mala would ask about the cost. Sentence D (Mala asking the price) follows sentence A. Finally, the shopkeeper would inform Mala of the price. Sentence C (Shopkeeper stating the price) logically follows sentence D. Thus, the correct sequence of sentences is B -> A -> D -> C. Step-by-Step Arrangement Step Action Sentence 1 Customer requests items B 2 Shopkeeper confirms items are ready/packed A 3 Customer asks for price D 4 Shopkeeper states price C The arranged paragraph reads: Mala: “Please give me a packet of balloons, two packets of streamers, and some candles.” Shopkeeper: “Here, I have packed them all.” Mala: “How much do I need to pay?” Shopkeeper: “Since we are offering some discount on the balloons, you need to pay only thirty rupees.” This sequence (BADC) forms a coherent and meaningful conversation between Mala and the Shopkeeper. Revision Table: Analyzing Sentence Order Sequence Logical Flow ABCD Requests -> Packs -> Price -> Asks Price (Illogical order of D and C) DABC Asks Price -> Requests -> Packs -> Price (Illogical start with asking price) BADC Requests -> Packs -> Asks Price -> Price (Logical conversational flow) CDAB Price -> Asks Price -> Packs -> Requests (Illogical sequence) Additional Information: Tips for Arranging Jumbled Sentences Arranging jumbled sentences to form a coherent paragraph requires identifying the logical connections between sentences. Here are some tips: Find the opening sentence: Look for a sentence that introduces the topic or situation. It often doesn't start with conjunctions (like 'and', 'but', 'so') or pronouns (like 'he', 'she', 'it', 'they') that refer to something mentioned previously. Identify connecting ideas: Look for sentences that logically follow each other. Pronouns, transition words (like 'therefore', 'however', 'also'), and repeated keywords can help link sentences. Look for concluding sentences: Some sentences summarize the main idea or provide a final statement. Follow chronological order: If the sentences describe events, arrange them in the order they happened. Understand the context: Read all sentences to grasp the overall theme or story. Check for cause and effect: Some sentences describe a cause, and others describe an effect.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 84archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in the blank. Himank's health has ______ ever since he has refused to get himself treated.

  1. A
    depreciated
  2. B
    disparaged
  3. C
    deteriorated
  4. D
    denigrated
Show answer
C. deteriorated

Understanding Vocabulary for Health Condition Questions The question asks us to select the most suitable word to describe the worsening of Himank's health because he has stopped getting treatment. We need a word that means to become worse in condition or quality, especially regarding health. Analyzing the Options Let's look at the meanings of the given options: depreciated: This word is typically used to describe a decrease in the value of an asset over time. For example, a car depreciates in value. It is not used to describe health. disparaged: This means to regard or represent as being of little worth; belittle. It's used when talking about someone's reputation, work, or ideas, not their physical health. deteriorated: This word means to become progressively worse. It is commonly used to describe the decline in the condition or quality of something, including a person's health. denigrated: This means to criticize unfairly or belittle someone's character or reputation. It is similar to 'disparaged' and is not related to physical health condition. Why 'Deteriorated' is the Correct Choice 'Deteriorated' perfectly fits the context of health getting worse. When someone refuses treatment for an illness, their condition is likely to worsen, or deteriorate. The sentence describes exactly this situation: Himank's health has declined (gotten worse) because he isn't getting treated. Comparing the options: Word Common Usage Applicable to Health? depreciated Value of assets, currency No disparaged Reputation, ideas, worth No deteriorated Condition, quality, health Yes denigrated Character, reputation No Based on the meanings, 'deteriorated' is the only word that accurately describes the worsening of health. The other words relate to value, reputation, or criticism, not physical condition. Conclusion The sentence requires a word that means 'become worse', especially in relation to health. The word 'deteriorated' has this meaning and is commonly used in this context. Therefore, the most appropriate option to fill in the blank is 'deteriorated'. Revision Table: Key Vocabulary for Describing Change Word Meaning Context Example Depreciate To decrease in value over time Cars depreciate quickly. Disparage To regard or represent as being of little worth Don't disparage his efforts. Deteriorate To become progressively worse Her health deteriorated rapidly. Denigrate To criticize unfairly; belittle He felt denigrated by the comments. Additional Information: Vocabulary Related to Health Status Understanding vocabulary related to health conditions is crucial for clear communication. Here are a few more terms and their meanings: Improve: To get better. (Opposite of deteriorate) Recover: To return to a normal state of health, mind, or strength. Stabilize: To become or make stable or fixed; stop worsening. Fluctuate: To rise and fall irregularly in number or amount; vary. (Health can fluctuate, meaning it gets better and worse intermittently). Regress: To return to a former or less developed state. (Can be used in a medical context, e.g., a tumor regressed). Using the correct term helps accurately convey the situation, whether discussing a patient's condition or general well-being.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 85archived

Sentences of a paragraph are given below in jumbled order. Arrange the sentences in the right order to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph. A. They stopped at a village on the way to rest and drink water and found the entire village had gathered to watch a weightlifter who was putting on a performance. B. Tenali was very impressed and exclaimed, “You are very strong!” C. With his big arms and bulging muscles, he picked up a 200-kg bag of rice with ease. D. One day Tenali Raman and his wife were on their way to Hampi.

  1. A
    DBCA
  2. B
    CDAB
  3. C
    BDCA
  4. D
    DACB
Show answer
D. DACB

Arranging Jumbled Sentences for Paragraph Coherence The task is to arrange the given sentences (A, B, C, D) in a logical order to form a meaningful and coherent paragraph. We need to identify the flow of events or ideas presented in the sentences. Let's analyze each sentence: Sentence D: "One day Tenali Raman and his wife were on their way to Hampi." This sentence introduces the main characters, Tenali Raman and his wife, and sets the scene by stating where they were going. This is a typical introductory sentence for a narrative paragraph. Sentence A: "They stopped at a village on the way to rest and drink water and found the entire village had gathered to watch a weightlifter who was putting on a performance." This sentence describes an event that happened during their journey introduced in sentence D. Stopping on the way to Hampi fits logically after starting the journey. Sentence C: "With his big arms and bulging muscles, he picked up a 200-kg bag of rice with ease." This sentence describes the weightlifter mentioned in sentence A performing an act of strength. This sentence provides details about the "performance" referred to in A. Sentence B: "Tenali was very impressed and exclaimed, “You are very strong!”" This sentence describes Tenali Raman's reaction to witnessing the weightlifter's act described in sentence C. A reaction typically follows an action or event. Based on this analysis, the most logical sequence is as follows: Start with the introduction of the characters and their journey (D). Describe something that happened during the journey, like stopping somewhere (A). Describe the specific event or performance they witnessed at that stop (C). Describe the reaction to that event (B). This leads to the order D → A → C → B, which is DACB. Let's read the sentences in the order DACB to check for coherence: One day Tenali Raman and his wife were on their way to Hampi. They stopped at a village on the way to rest and drink water and found the entire village had gathered to watch a weightlifter who was putting on a performance. With his big arms and bulging muscles, he picked up a 200-kg bag of rice with ease. Tenali was very impressed and exclaimed, “You are very strong!” This sequence forms a clear and meaningful narrative about Tenali Raman's journey and an interesting stop along the way where they witnessed a weightlifter and reacted to the performance. The flow of events is smooth and logical. Revision Table: Jumbled Sentence Arrangement Sentence Content Logical Place Reasoning D Journey begins (Tenali and wife to Hampi) 1st Introduces characters and setting. A Stop at village; find weightlifter performance 2nd Happens during the journey (on the way). C Description of weightlifter's feat (picking 200-kg bag) 3rd Details the performance mentioned in A. B Tenali's reaction (impressed, calls him strong) 4th Reaction follows witnessing the feat in C. Additional Information: Paragraph Structure and Coherence A well-structured paragraph typically follows a logical flow to ensure coherence. Understanding common paragraph structures can help in arranging jumbled sentences. Some common structures include: Narrative: Presents events in chronological order, like a story. The sentences about Tenali Raman follow this structure. Descriptive: Describes a person, place, or thing using sensory details. Expository: Explains a concept, provides information, or defines something. Persuasive: Presents an argument and supports it with evidence. To solve jumbled sentence problems, look for: Introductory sentence: Often introduces the main topic or characters (like D). Connecting words and phrases: Words like "therefore," "however," "in addition," "on the way," "then," "later" can indicate links between sentences. Pronoun references: Pronouns (he, she, it, they) often refer back to nouns mentioned in previous sentences (e.g., "They" in A refers to Tenali Raman and his wife from D; "he" in C refers to the "weightlifter" in A). Cause and effect: One sentence might describe a cause, and the next describes its effect. Action and reaction: A sentence describes an action, and the following sentence describes a reaction to it (like C and B). By carefully analyzing these elements, you can piece together the correct order of sentences to form a coherent paragraph.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 86archived

Select the most appropriate synonym of the given word. BRAT

  1. A
    Spoilt child
  2. B
    Wise man
  3. C
    Rich person
  4. D
    Plumb lady
Show answer
A. Spoilt child

Finding the Synonym for BRAT The question asks us to select the most appropriate synonym for the given word "BRAT". A synonym is a word or phrase that means exactly or nearly the same as another word or phrase in the same language. Understanding the Word BRAT The word "BRAT" is typically used informally, often disapprovingly, to describe a child. It refers to a child who is badly behaved, rude, or annoying, often because they are spoilt or demanding. Analyzing the Options Let's examine each option to see which one best matches the meaning of "BRAT": Spoilt child: A spoilt child is one who is allowed to do or have anything they want, and consequently, they often behave badly or are demanding. This definition aligns very closely with the common usage and meaning of "BRAT". Wise man: A wise man is someone who has experience, knowledge, and good judgment. This meaning is completely opposite to the meaning of "BRAT". Rich person: A rich person is someone who has a lot of money or possessions. While a spoilt child might come from a wealthy background, the word "BRAT" specifically refers to behavior and character, not financial status. Plumb lady: This phrase doesn't represent a standard English idiom or term with a widely recognized meaning that relates to the behavior of a child. Assuming it might relate to 'plump' (slightly fat) or 'plumb' in the sense of direct/exact, neither fits the meaning of "BRAT". Identifying the Correct Synonym Based on the analysis, the option that is the most appropriate synonym for "BRAT" is "Spoilt child". Both terms describe a child exhibiting undesirable behavior often linked to being indulged or demanding. Word Meaning Synonym Match? BRAT A badly-behaved or spoilt child. - Spoilt child A child indulged to the extent of being badly behaved. Yes Wise man Person with good judgment and knowledge. No Rich person Person with much wealth. No (relates to wealth, not behavior) Plumb lady Not a standard term related to child behavior. No Therefore, "Spoilt child" is the best synonym for "BRAT". Revision Table: Vocabulary Practice Word Synonym Antonym (if applicable) Example Sentence BRAT Spoilt child Well-behaved child He was acting like a little brat because he didn't get his way. Wise Sagacious, Knowledgeable Foolish, Ignorant She is known as a wise leader who makes thoughtful decisions. Rich Wealthy, Affluent Poor, Impoverished They became very rich after their business succeeded. Additional Information: Understanding Synonyms Synonyms are important for improving vocabulary and making writing and speech more varied and interesting. While synonyms have similar meanings, they are not always interchangeable in every context. The best synonym often depends on the specific nuance or connotation you want to convey. Using synonyms helps avoid repetition. Choosing the right synonym can add precision to your language. Context is key when selecting a synonym. For example, "happy" has synonyms like "joyful," "cheerful," "ecstatic," and "content." Each word implies a slightly different degree or kind of happiness.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 87archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in the blank. Use your logical thinking for ______ decisions today as you will certainly succeed.

  1. A
    critical
  2. B
    severe
  3. C
    dangerous
  4. D
    desperate
Show answer
A. critical

Understanding the Sentence and Finding the Right Word The question asks us to complete the sentence: "Use your logical thinking for ______ decisions today as you will certainly succeed." We need to select the word from the options that best fits the blank, making the sentence grammatically correct and logically sound. The sentence suggests that applying logical thinking to certain types of decisions will lead to success. This implies that the decisions are significant enough to require careful thought, and that logical thinking is a key factor in achieving a positive outcome. Analyzing the Options for Logical Thinking and Decisions Let's look at each option and consider how well it fits the context, especially the idea that logical thinking leads to success in these particular decisions. Option 1: critical The word 'critical' means involving an important decision or a crucial stage. Critical decisions are those that have significant consequences and require careful evaluation. Using logical thinking is essential for making sound critical decisions. The promise of certain success aligns well with the idea that applying the right approach (logical thinking) to important decisions yields positive results. Option 2: severe 'Severe' typically describes something bad or undesirable, like severe pain or severe weather. Severe decisions isn't a common or appropriate phrase in this context. Logical thinking helps deal with severe situations, but 'severe decisions' itself doesn't fit the intended meaning of choices that lead to success. Option 3: dangerous 'Dangerous' implies risk and potential harm. While logical thinking is vital when making decisions in dangerous situations to minimize risk, the sentence promises 'certain success', which doesn't naturally follow from merely making a decision in a dangerous context. The focus here is on the type of decision where logical thought guarantees success, not just mitigating danger. Option 4: desperate 'Desperate' decisions are often made in a state of urgency or hopelessness, sometimes without thorough consideration. Logical thinking can be hard to apply when feeling desperate. Furthermore, 'certain success' is not typically associated with decisions made out of desperation; they are often last resorts with uncertain outcomes. Evaluating the Best Fit for Logical Thinking and Success Comparing the options, 'critical' is the most suitable word. Critical decisions are important and require logical thinking, and applying logical thinking to them can indeed lead to success. The other options describe negative or risky situations rather than the type of important choices where logical thought is the direct path to a successful outcome as implied by the sentence. Comparison of Options with Sentence Context Option Meaning Related to Decisions Fits "Use logical thinking"? Fits "certainly succeed"? Overall Fit critical Important, crucial Yes, essential for critical decisions Yes, logical thinking on critical decisions leads to success Strong severe Intensely bad (not typically applied to decisions) Indirectly (dealing with severe situations) No Poor dangerous Involving risk, potential harm Yes, to mitigate risk No, success isn't certain in dangerous situations Poor desperate Made out of hopelessness/urgency Often difficult to apply No, outcomes are uncertain Poor Therefore, using logical thinking for critical decisions today is presented as a path to certain success. Revision Table: Key Learnings Understanding Vocabulary in Context Concept Explanation Relevance to Question Logical Thinking Using reason and evidence to make conclusions or decisions. The core tool mentioned for making decisions. Critical Decisions Important choices with significant consequences. The type of decisions likely requiring logical thinking for success. Vocabulary in Context Choosing words based on how they fit the meaning of the surrounding text. Essential for selecting the correct option. Additional Information: The Importance of Critical Thinking and Decision Making The sentence highlights the value of applying logical thinking, often part of critical thinking, to important choices. Critical thinking involves analyzing information objectively and making reasoned judgments. When faced with critical decisions, using a structured approach can be very helpful. This might involve: Identifying the decision clearly. Gathering relevant information. Analyzing the information. Identifying possible options. Evaluating each option based on criteria and potential outcomes. Choosing the best option based on the logical analysis. This systematic process, powered by logical thinking, increases the likelihood of making effective critical decisions and achieving desired outcomes, much like the "certain success" mentioned in the sentence.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 88archived

The following sentence has been divided into parts. One of them contains an error. Select the part that contains the error from the given options. No sooner did Priya / get her report card / when she started jumping / with joy.

  1. A
    get her report card
  2. B
    with joy
  3. C
    No sooner did Priya
  4. D
    when she started jumping
Show answer
D. when she started jumping

Identifying Grammatical Errors in Sentences The question asks us to find the part of the given sentence that contains a grammatical error. Let's examine the sentence and its parts. The sentence is: No sooner did Priya / get her report card / when she started jumping / with joy. It is divided into the following parts: No sooner did Priya get her report card when she started jumping with joy We need to identify which of these parts has an error. Analyzing the Sentence Structure: No Sooner The sentence begins with "No sooner did Priya...". This structure, starting with "No sooner", is an example of inversion, where the auxiliary verb ("did") comes before the subject ("Priya"). This structure is commonly used to emphasize that one event happened immediately after another. The phrase "No sooner" is part of a correlative conjunction pair. Correlative conjunctions are pairs of words used to connect elements of equal grammatical rank. The correct correlative conjunction paired with "No sooner" is "than". The structure is typically "No sooner + auxiliary verb + subject + main verb + ... + than + second clause". Locating the Error In the given sentence, the first part is "No sooner did Priya", which correctly uses the inverted structure with "No sooner" and the auxiliary verb "did". The second part, "get her report card", is the main action following the auxiliary verb. The third part is "when she started jumping". The fourth part is "with joy". According to the rule for "No sooner", it should be followed by "than" to introduce the second event. However, the sentence uses "when" instead of "than" in the third part ("when she started jumping"). Let's compare the incorrect and correct structures: Incorrect: No sooner did Priya get her report card when she started jumping with joy. Correct: No sooner did Priya get her report card than she started jumping with joy. Therefore, the part "when she started jumping" contains the error because it uses "when" instead of the required conjunction "than" after "No sooner". Conclusion The error lies in the use of "when" after "No sooner". The correct conjunction to follow "No sooner" is "than". The part containing the error is "when she started jumping". Sentence Parts Analysis Part Sentence Segment Analysis Error? 1 No sooner did Priya Correct use of No sooner + inversion No 2 get her report card Correct main verb form after 'did' No 3 when she started jumping Incorrect conjunction 'when' after 'No sooner'; should be 'than' Yes 4 with joy Prepositional phrase modifying the action No Revision Table: Correlative Conjunctions and Inversion Correlative Conjunctions and Inversion Rules Conjunction/Phrase Pairing Conjunction Example (with inversion) No sooner than No sooner had I finished studying than the power went out. Hardly when/before Hardly had I left the house when it started raining. Scarcely when/before Scarcely had they begun the show when the lights flickered. Additional Information: Negative Inversion Starting a sentence with certain negative adverbs or adverbial phrases often requires inversion, where the auxiliary verb comes before the subject. This adds emphasis. Examples of phrases that trigger inversion: Never Rarely Seldom Little Only then Not only... but also Under no circumstances On no account No sooner... than Hardly/Scarcely... when/before For instance: Incorrect: I have never seen such a beautiful sight. (Standard order) Correct (Inversion): Never have I seen such a beautiful sight. Incorrect: He not only finished the work but also helped others. (Standard order) Correct (Inversion): Not only did he finish the work, but he also helped others. In the given question, "No sooner did Priya get..." is a correct application of inversion following "No sooner". The error was solely in using "when" instead of "than".

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 89archived

Select the most appropriate ANTONYM of the given word. Comfort

  1. A
    Happiness
  2. B
    Discontentment
  3. C
    Luxury
  4. D
    Enjoyment
Show answer
B. Discontentment

Finding the Antonym of Comfort The question asks us to select the most appropriate antonym of the given word, which is Comfort. First, let's understand the meaning of the word Comfort. Comfort generally refers to a state of physical ease and freedom from pain or constraint, or a state of emotional ease, contentment, and freedom from worry or anxiety. An antonym is a word that means the opposite of another word. Now let's analyze the given options to find the word that is most opposite in meaning to Comfort: Happiness: This refers to a state of well-being and contentment. While related to comfort, it is often a result of comfort or a feeling that accompanies it, rather than its direct opposite. Discontentment: This refers to a state of unhappiness or dissatisfaction. This is the opposite of contentment, ease, and satisfaction which are key aspects of comfort. If someone is in a state of discomfort, they are likely experiencing discontentment. Luxury: This refers to a state of great comfort, extravagance, and elegance, especially when involving great expense. Luxury is a heightened form of comfort, not its opposite. Enjoyment: This refers to the state or process of taking pleasure in something. Like happiness, it is related to positive feelings often associated with comfort, but it is not the opposite of comfort itself. Comparing the options, Discontentment represents a state of dissatisfaction, unhappiness, or lack of ease, which is the most appropriate opposite to the state of ease and contentment implied by Comfort. Word Analysis: Comfort and Options Word Meaning Relationship to Comfort Comfort State of physical/emotional ease, contentment Given word Happiness State of well-being, contentment Related, often a result Discontentment State of unhappiness, dissatisfaction Opposite (Antonym) Luxury State of great comfort, extravagance Related, enhanced form Enjoyment State of taking pleasure Related, often associated Based on the analysis, Discontentment is the most appropriate antonym for Comfort. Revision Table: Understanding Antonyms Key Concepts: Antonyms Term Definition Example Antonym A word opposite in meaning to another word. Hot <> Cold Synonym A word similar in meaning to another word. Happy <> Joyful Additional Information: Expanding Your Vocabulary Understanding antonyms and synonyms is a crucial part of building strong vocabulary. When you learn a new word, try to find words with similar meanings (synonyms) and opposite meanings (antonyms). This helps you understand the nuances of language and use words more effectively in different contexts. For example, other words related to a lack of comfort or discomfort might include: unease, discomfort, suffering, hardship, misery. The exact antonym can sometimes depend on the specific context in which the word 'comfort' is used (physical vs. emotional comfort).

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 90archived

Select the most appropriate synonym of the given word. Deride

  1. A
    Mock
  2. B
    Lift
  3. C
    Admire
  4. D
    Approve
Show answer
A. Mock

Understanding the Word Deride and Finding its Synonym The question asks us to find the most appropriate synonym for the word "Deride". A synonym is a word that has the same or nearly the same meaning as another word. Let's first understand the meaning of the word "Deride". Definition of Deride The word "Deride" means to express contempt for; ridicule; make fun of. It involves treating someone or something as ridiculous or worthless. Analyzing the Options Now let's examine each of the given options: Mock: To mock someone or something means to make fun of them in a cruel way; ridicule. This meaning is very close to that of "Deride". Lift: To lift means to raise something or someone to a higher position. This word is related to physical movement and has no relation to the meaning of "Deride". Admire: To admire means to regard with respect or warm approval. This is the opposite of "Deride", as it involves showing respect rather than contempt. Approve: To approve means to officially agree to or accept something as satisfactory. This word is about giving consent or permission and is not related to the meaning of "Deride". Identifying the Most Appropriate Synonym Comparing the meaning of "Deride" with the options, "Mock" is the word that shares the closest meaning, both involving making fun of or ridiculing someone or something with contempt. Therefore, the most appropriate synonym for "Deride" is "Mock". Synonyms and Antonyms of Deride Understanding related words can further clarify the meaning. Synonyms of Deride: Mock, ridicule, scoff at, jibe at, make fun of, taunt, sneer at, disparage, belittle. Antonyms of Deride: Admire, praise, applaud, commend, respect, approve. Based on this analysis, "Mock" is clearly the correct synonym among the given options. Word and its Meaning Word Meaning Deride To ridicule or mock with contempt. Mock To ridicule or make fun of. Lift To raise something to a higher position. Admire To regard with respect or approval. Approve To agree to or accept as satisfactory. Thus, the option that is the most appropriate synonym of "Deride" is "Mock". Revision Table: Quick Vocabulary Review Vocabulary Quick Check Word Type Meaning Synonym Example Antonym Example Deride Verb To mock or ridicule with contempt. Scoff at Admire Mock Verb To make fun of or ridicule. Deride Praise Additional Information: Expanding Vocabulary Learning synonyms and antonyms is a great way to improve your vocabulary. When you learn a new word like "Deride", try to find other words with similar meanings (synonyms) and opposite meanings (antonyms). This helps you understand the nuances of language and express yourself more precisely. Consider these points when expanding your vocabulary: Understand the context in which a word is used. Look up definitions in reliable dictionaries. Practice using new words in sentences. Explore word families (different forms of the same word, e.g., deride - derision - derisive). Building a strong vocabulary is crucial for excelling in language-based exams and improving communication skills.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 91archived

Select the most appropriate meaning of the following idiom. Lion's share

  1. A
    The strongest and richest partner in a group
  2. B
    The part that must be left for the guests in a party
  3. C
    The greatest and most desirable portion of something
  4. D
    The sound produced by a lion when it is attacking a prey
Show answer
C. The greatest and most desirable portion of something

Understanding the "Lion's Share" Idiom The question asks for the most appropriate meaning of the idiom "Lion's share". Idioms are phrases or expressions whose meaning cannot be deduced from the ordinary meanings of its individual words. Understanding common English idioms is important for improving vocabulary and comprehension. Meaning of "Lion's Share" The idiom "Lion's share" originates from a fable by Aesop where a lion hunts with other animals but claims the largest portion of the prey for himself, asserting his strength and dominance. Thus, the "Lion's share" refers to the largest, greatest, or most desirable part of something that is divided or shared. Analyzing the Options Let's examine the given options in the context of the idiom's meaning: Option 1: The strongest and richest partner in a group. While a lion is strong, the idiom specifically refers to the portion received, not the nature of the partner receiving it. This option is incorrect. Option 2: The part that must be left for the guests in a party. This refers to something reserved for others, which is the opposite of claiming the largest part for oneself. This option is incorrect. Option 3: The greatest and most desirable portion of something. This accurately reflects the meaning derived from the fable – the largest and best part taken by the dominant party (the lion). This option is correct. Option 4: The sound produced by a lion when it is attacking a prey. This option relates to a literal sound a lion makes, not the figurative meaning of sharing or dividing something. This option is incorrect. Conclusion on the "Lion's Share" Idiom Based on the analysis of the options and the established meaning of the idiom "Lion's share", the most appropriate meaning is "The greatest and most desirable portion of something". Revision Table: Key Idioms and Meanings Idiom Meaning Example Usage Lion's Share The largest or greatest portion of something He took the lion's share of the profits. Beat around the bush Avoiding the main topic; not speaking directly Stop beating around the bush and tell me what you want. Break a leg Good luck (often said to actors before a performance) Go on stage and break a leg! Let the cat out of the bag To reveal a secret by mistake I accidentally let the cat out of the bag about the surprise party. Additional Information on Idioms Idioms are a fascinating part of any language. They add color and depth to communication but can be tricky for learners because their meaning isn't obvious from the individual words. Here are some points about idioms: They are fixed phrases; changing the words can change or destroy the meaning. They often have cultural or historical origins, like "Lion's share" from Aesop's fables. Learning idioms helps in understanding native speakers and enhances your own expressive ability. Context is key to understanding and using idioms correctly. Mastering idioms like "Lion's share" is a valuable step in improving your English language proficiency for exams and everyday communication.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 92archived

The following sentence has been divided into parts. One of them contains an error. Select the part that contains the error from the given options. Four of earliest civilisations / of the world / were located / on the banks of or near large rivers.

  1. A
    Four of earliest civilisations
  2. B
    of the world
  3. C
    were located on the banks of
  4. D
    or near large rivers
Show answer
A. Four of earliest civilisations

Understanding the Grammar Error in the Sentence The question asks us to identify the part of the given sentence that contains a grammatical error. The sentence is divided into four parts: Four of earliest civilisations of the world were located on the banks of or near large rivers. We need to examine each part to find the mistake. Analyzing Each Part of the Sentence Let's look closely at each segment: Part 1: Four of earliest civilisations This part discusses "earliest civilisations". When we talk about a specific number or group out of the "earliest" (which is a superlative form of the adjective 'early') items from a set, we usually use "of the" before the superlative adjective. For example, "one of the best", "some of the largest". In this case, "earliest civilisations" refers to the civilisations that existed first. When selecting "Four" from this group using "of", the definite article 'the' is required before 'earliest'. So, the correct phrasing should be "Four of the earliest civilisations". This part seems to contain an error. Part 2: of the world This phrase modifies "civilisations" and is grammatically correct in this context, specifying the scope (civilisations belonging to the world). Part 3: were located on the banks of "were located" is the correct passive voice verb form for a plural subject ("civilisations"). "on the banks of" is a standard prepositional phrase used to indicate location next to a river. This part appears grammatically sound. Part 4: or near large rivers This part continues the description of the location, offering an alternative ("near large rivers") connected by the conjunction "or". This structure is grammatically correct and logical in the sentence. Identifying the Part with the Error Based on our analysis, the first part, "Four of earliest civilisations", is missing the definite article 'the' before the superlative adjective 'earliest'. The correct structure when using "of" with a superlative adjective followed by a plural noun is typically "of + the + superlative adjective + plural noun". Therefore, the part containing the error is "Four of earliest civilisations". Correcting the Sentence The corrected sentence would read: "Four of the earliest civilisations of the world were located on the banks of or near large rivers." Summary of Sentence Parts and Error Status Part Text Contains Error? Explanation 1 Four of earliest civilisations Yes Missing 'the' before 'earliest'. 2 of the world No Grammatically correct. 3 were located on the banks of No Grammatically correct verb and phrase. 4 or near large rivers No Grammatically correct phrase and conjunction. The option corresponding to the incorrect part is "Four of earliest civilisations". Revision Table: Sentence Grammar Error Analysis Revision Points for Article Usage with Superlatives Grammar Concept Rule Example from Sentence Correct Form Articles with Superlatives (using 'of') When using "of" to select from a group described by a superlative, use "of the" before the superlative adjective and plural noun. "Four of earliest civilisations" "Four of the earliest civilisations" Additional Information: Using 'the' with Superlatives The definite article 'the' is almost always used before a superlative adjective. Superlative adjectives are used to describe an item that is at the upper or lower limit of a quality (e.g., tallest, smallest, fastest, earliest, latest). Rule: Use 'the' before a superlative adjective. Example: Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world. When you use a structure like "one of...", "some of...", "four of...", etc., followed by a superlative adjective and a plural noun, you are picking one or more items from a specific group that is the "most" or "least" in some quality. In this construction, 'the' is essential. Correct Structure: [Number/Quantifier] of the + superlative adjective + plural noun. Examples: One of the best books I have read. Some of the most interesting facts. Five of the largest cities in the country. Four of the earliest civilisations (as in our sentence). Failing to include 'the' in this context is a common grammatical error involving articles and superlative adjectives.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 93archived

Select the option that can be used as a one-word substitute for the given group of words. A person who thinks that bad things are more likely to happen or who emphasises the bad part of a situation

  1. A
    Complainer
  2. B
    Optimist
  3. C
    Misanthropist
  4. D
    Pessimist
Show answer
D. Pessimist

Understanding the One-Word Substitute Requirement The question asks us to identify a single word that accurately describes a specific type of person. The definition provided is: "A person who thinks that bad things are more likely to happen or who emphasises the bad part of a situation". We need to find the best fit among the given options for this description. Analyzing the Core Definition: Focusing on Negativity The key characteristics highlighted in the definition are: Expecting negative outcomes: The person believes that undesirable events are probable. Emphasizing the negative side: The person tends to focus on the downsides or difficulties in any situation, rather than the positives. We are looking for a term that encapsulates this generally negative or gloomy outlook on life and circumstances. Evaluating Each Option Option 1: Complainer A Complainer is someone who frequently expresses dissatisfaction or annoyance about things. While a person who expects bad things might often complain, the word 'complainer' focuses on the expression of discontent rather than the underlying belief or expectation that bad things will happen. Therefore, it doesn't fully capture the essence of the definition. Option 2: Optimist An Optimist is defined as a person who tends to be hopeful and confident about the future or the success of something. This perspective is the direct opposite of the description given in the question, which focuses on expecting bad things. An optimist looks for the good, whereas the described person looks for the bad. Option 3: Misanthropist A Misanthropist is someone who dislikes humankind and tends to avoid human society. This term relates specifically to a dislike of people and society in general. The definition in the question is about expecting bad things to happen in various situations, not necessarily about hating people. Thus, 'misanthropist' is not the correct substitute. Option 4: Pessimist A Pessimist is a person who tends to see all the worst aspects of things or believe that the worst will happen. This definition aligns perfectly with the description provided: expecting bad things to be likely and emphasizing the negative parts of situations. A pessimist anticipates failure or difficulty. Comparison of Terms Meanings of Related Terms Term Definition Relation to Question Complainer One who expresses dissatisfaction. May complain due to expecting bad things, but focus is on expression. Optimist One who expects good outcomes and focuses on the positive. Opposite of the described person. Misanthropist One who dislikes humankind. Focuses on people, not general outlook on situations. Pessimist One who expects bad things and focuses on the negative aspects. Directly matches the definition provided. Conclusion: Identifying the Best One-Word Substitute Based on the analysis, the word that most accurately and specifically serves as a one-word substitute for "A person who thinks that bad things are more likely to happen or who emphasises the bad part of a situation" is Pessimist. This term captures both the expectation of negative events and the tendency to focus on the downside of circumstances.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 94archived

Select the option that expresses the given sentence in passive voice. The boy's cricket ball broke the neighbour's window.

  1. A
    The neighbour's window was broken by the boy's cricket ball.
  2. B
    The neighbour's window had been broke by the boy's cricket ball.
  3. C
    The neighbour's window was broke by the boy's cricket ball
  4. D
    The neighbour's window is broken by the boy's cricket ball
Show answer
A. The neighbour's window was broken by the boy's cricket ball.

Understanding Active and Passive Voice The question asks us to convert a sentence from active voice to passive voice. The original sentence is: "The boy's cricket ball broke the neighbour's window." Let's break down the original sentence: Subject: The boy's cricket ball Verb: broke Object: the neighbour's window This sentence is in the active voice because the subject (The boy's cricket ball) is performing the action (broke). Converting Past Simple Active to Passive Voice The verb "broke" is in the simple past tense. To convert a sentence from active voice (simple past) to passive voice, we follow this structure: Object + was/were + Past Participle of the main verb + by + Subject Let's apply this structure to our sentence: The object is "the neighbour's window". This becomes the new subject in the passive sentence. The new subject "the neighbour's window" is singular, so we use "was". The main verb is "broke". The past participle of "break" is "broken". The original subject is "the boy's cricket ball". This becomes the object of "by" in the passive sentence. Putting it all together, the passive voice sentence is: The neighbour's window + was + broken + by + the boy's cricket ball. So, the sentence in passive voice is: "The neighbour's window was broken by the boy's cricket ball." Analysing the Options for Passive Voice Let's look at the given options: The neighbour's window was broken by the boy's cricket ball. The neighbour's window had been broke by the boy's cricket ball. The neighbour's window was broke by the boy's cricket ball The neighbour's window is broken by the boy's cricket ball Comparing these options with our constructed passive sentence: Option 1 matches our correctly formed passive sentence in the simple past tense. It uses "was" and the past participle "broken". Option 2 uses "had been broke". This structure ("had been" + past participle) is for the Past Perfect Passive voice. Also, "broke" is incorrect; the past participle is "broken". The original sentence is in the simple past, not past perfect. Option 3 uses "was broke". While it uses "was" for the simple past passive, it incorrectly uses the simple past form "broke" instead of the past participle "broken". Option 4 uses "is broken". This structure ("is" + past participle) is for the Present Simple Passive voice. The original sentence is in the simple past tense ("broke"), so the passive form must also be in the past. Therefore, only Option 1 correctly converts the original simple past active sentence into the simple past passive voice. Revision Table: Active vs. Passive Voice (Simple Past) Aspect Active Voice (Simple Past) Passive Voice (Simple Past) Structure Subject + Verb (Past Tense) + Object Object + was/were + Past Participle + by + Subject Focus On the doer of the action (Subject) On the action and the receiver (Object becoming new Subject) Example (Our Sentence) The boy's cricket ball broke the neighbour's window. The neighbour's window was broken by the boy's cricket ball. Additional Information on Voice Change Changing the voice of a sentence means altering the relationship between the subject and the verb. In the active voice, the subject performs the action. In the passive voice, the subject receives the action. The choice between active and passive voice often depends on what you want to emphasize. If the doer of the action is more important or known, active voice is usually preferred. If the action itself or the recipient of the action is more important, or if the doer is unknown, passive voice is often used. Not all verbs can be used in the passive voice. Transitive verbs (verbs that take an object) can usually be made passive, while intransitive verbs (verbs that do not take an object) cannot. Remember that the tense of the verb remains the same when converting from active to passive voice. If the active sentence is in the simple past, the passive sentence will also be in the simple past using "was/were" + past participle.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 95archived

Select the most appropriate meaning of the following idiom. A live wire

  1. A
    A dangerous and evil person
  2. B
    A very active or energetic person
  3. C
    An influential and powerful person
  4. D
    An angry and bad-tempered person
Show answer
B. A very active or energetic person

Understanding Idioms: The Meaning of 'A Live Wire' Idioms are phrases where the meaning isn't obvious from the individual words. Understanding common English idioms is important for improving language skills. Let's explore the meaning of the idiom "A live wire". What does 'A Live Wire' mean? The idiom "A live wire" uses the image of an electrical wire that is currently carrying electricity – full of energy and potentially exciting or unpredictable. Metaphorically, it refers to a person who is full of energy, very active, enthusiastic, and often lively or spirited. Analyzing the Options for 'A Live Wire' Let's look at the given options and see which one best fits the meaning of "A live wire": Option 1: A dangerous and evil person This meaning does not align with the common understanding of "A live wire," which focuses on energy and activity, not danger or malice. Option 2: A very active or energetic person This option perfectly captures the essence of the idiom. A "live wire" is someone who is always busy, full of life, and has a lot of energy. Option 3: An influential and powerful person While an energetic person might become influential, the idiom itself specifically describes their energy level and activity, not necessarily their power or influence. Option 4: An angry and bad-tempered person This description is contrary to the meaning of "A live wire," which suggests enthusiasm and activity, not anger or bad temper. Conclusion: The Correct Meaning of 'A Live Wire' Based on the analysis, the most appropriate meaning of the idiom "A live wire" is a person who is very active and energetic. The correct option is therefore: A very active or energetic person. Idiom Meaning A live wire A very active or energetic person Revision Table: Key Idiom Meanings Idiom Meaning Example Usage A live wire A very active, energetic, and enthusiastic person. She's such a live wire; she's always organizing events and full of ideas. A couch potato A lazy person who spends a lot of time watching television. After work, he turns into a couch potato and just watches TV all evening. Full of beans Having a lot of energy and enthusiasm. The kids were full of beans after the party. Additional Information: Exploring Energy-Related Idioms English has many idioms to describe people's energy levels and personalities. Understanding these idioms helps in grasping nuances in conversation and writing. For instance, while "a live wire" suggests positive, vibrant energy, other idioms might describe different kinds of energy or lack thereof. Some idioms describe low energy or laziness, like "a couch potato" or "lazy bones". Others describe someone who is easily excited or restless, though "a live wire" usually implies productive energy rather than just restlessness. Comparing idioms like "full of beans" and "a live wire" can show subtle differences in meaning – "full of beans" often describes temporary high spirits, while "a live wire" can describe a more consistent personality trait. Learning idioms in context, through examples and practice, is an effective way to remember their meanings.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 96archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number (1).

  1. A
    by
  2. B
    of
  3. C
    in
  4. D
    at
Show answer
B. of

Understanding the Passage and Blank (1) The passage discusses tourism as a significant global industry and its economic importance, while also highlighting its contribution to climate change. The sentence containing blank (1) is: "Tourism is one (1)______ the biggest businesses in the world..." We need to select the most appropriate word to fill this blank from the given options. Analyzing the Options for Blank (1) Let's look at the options provided for blank (1): Option 1: by Option 2: of Option 3: in Option 4: at Selecting the Correct Word for Blank (1) The structure "one ______ the" is commonly used in English to talk about one item from a group or collection. The standard phrase for this is "one of the". "one of the biggest businesses" means one business from the group of "the biggest businesses". This structure is grammatically correct and makes perfect sense in the context of the sentence. Let's consider why the other options are not suitable: "one by the biggest businesses": This phrase is not standard English and doesn't convey the intended meaning of identifying tourism as one among the biggest businesses. "one in the biggest businesses": While "in" can indicate location, "one in the biggest businesses" is not the idiomatic way to say "one among the group of biggest businesses". You might say "one company in the biggest businesses" but "one in the biggest businesses" as a standalone phrase following "Tourism is" is incorrect here. "one at the biggest businesses": Similar to "in", "at" indicates location or position. "One at the biggest businesses" does not fit the grammatical structure or meaning required here. Therefore, the only option that correctly completes the phrase "one ______ the biggest businesses" to mean "one example from the group of the biggest businesses" is "of". The completed sentence fragment is "Tourism is one of the biggest businesses in the world..." Conclusion for Blank (1) Based on the analysis of the grammatical structure and common English phrases, the most appropriate word to fill in blank number (1) is "of". This forms the standard phrase "one of the biggest businesses". Analysis of Options for Blank (1) Option Word Suitability Reason 1 by Incorrect Does not form a standard or meaningful phrase in this context. 2 of Correct Forms the standard phrase "one of the", meaning one from a group. 3 in Incorrect Grammatically awkward and not the idiomatic way to express this idea. 4 at Incorrect Grammatically awkward and not the idiomatic way to express this idea. Revision Table: Understanding "One of the" Structure Key Concepts: "One of the" Structure Usage Example One of the + plural noun Used to identify a single item/person from a group of multiple similar items/people. She is one of the best students in the class. One of + possessive pronoun/noun + plural noun Similar usage, referring to a group belonging to someone or something. That is one of my favourite books. One of the + superlative adjective + plural noun Used to indicate something is a single instance among the most extreme examples of a quality. Mount Everest is one of the highest mountains in the world. (Like in the passage) Additional Information: Importance of Prepositions This question highlights the critical role of prepositions in English grammar. Prepositions like 'of', 'in', 'at', 'by', 'for', etc., connect nouns, pronouns, or phrases to other words in a sentence, indicating relationships like location, time, direction, or possession. Choosing the correct preposition is essential for clear and accurate communication. Many verbs, nouns, and adjectives are followed by specific prepositions, forming fixed phrases (e.g., 'fond of', 'believe in', 'arrive at', 'responsible for'). Understanding these idiomatic expressions and grammatical structures is key to mastering English fill-in-the-blanks questions. In the context of "one of the", 'of' is the standard preposition used to show selection from a group.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 97archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number (2).

  1. A
    at least
  2. B
    at most
  3. C
    at last
  4. D
    at much
Show answer
A. at least

Understanding the Tourism Passage and Blank (2) The passage discusses tourism as a significant global industry with both positive economic impacts (job creation) and negative environmental consequences (climate change due to carbon emissions). We need to select the most appropriate word or phrase to fill in blank number (2). The sentence containing blank (2) is: "Tourism is one (1)______ the biggest businesses in the world, generating (2)______ 200 million jobs." The phrase needed for blank (2) should describe the quantity of jobs generated by tourism, specifically in relation to "200 million". Let's look at the options. Analyzing the Options for Blank (2) We need to choose the phrase that best fits the context of describing the scale of job creation. at least: This phrase means 'not less than; at the minimum'. If tourism generates 'at least 200 million jobs', it means the number of jobs is 200 million or more. at most: This phrase means 'not more than; at the maximum'. If tourism generates 'at most 200 million jobs', it means the number of jobs is 200 million or less. at last: This phrase means 'eventually, after a long time' or 'finally'. It refers to a point in time or the conclusion of something. at much: This phrase is grammatically incorrect in this context. "Much" is typically used with uncountable nouns. To indicate a large quantity with a countable noun like "jobs", phrases like "a lot of" or simply a number like "200 million" are used. "At much" does not convey a specific meaning of quantity or limit in this structure. Evaluating Options in Context The passage highlights tourism as "one of the biggest businesses in the world". This suggests a large scale of operation and impact. Generating "200 million jobs" sounds like a very large number, consistent with being a "biggest business". Saying it generates "at most 200 million jobs" would imply that 200 million is the upper limit, potentially suggesting the number might be less, which doesn't fully convey the scale expected from "one of the biggest businesses". Saying it generates "at last 200 million jobs" makes no sense grammatically or contextually. It doesn't relate to the quantity of jobs generated. Saying it generates "at much 200 million jobs" is grammatically incorrect. Saying it generates "at least 200 million jobs" indicates that 200 million is a minimum number, suggesting the actual number could be even higher. This aligns well with the description of tourism as one of the world's biggest businesses and the scale of job creation it implies. Conclusion for Blank (2) Based on the analysis of the options and the context of the sentence, the phrase "at least" is the most appropriate choice for blank (2). The completed sentence would be: "It is vital for the economies of (3)______ countries. The downside is that tourism is a major (4)______ of climate change through the carbon (5)______ it causes." (Note: This is the sentence following the blank (2) sentence, provided for full passage context). The sentence in question is: "Tourism is one (1)______ the biggest businesses in the world, generating at least 200 million jobs." Revision Table: Analyzing Fill in the Blanks Options Option Meaning Fit in Context Appropriateness for Blank (2) at least Not less than; minimum Indicates a minimum number of jobs, suggesting a large scale aligned with "biggest businesses". Most appropriate at most Not more than; maximum Indicates an upper limit, less emphatic about the large scale. Less appropriate at last Eventually; finally Refers to time; does not fit the context of quantity. Incorrect at much Incorrect phrase for countable nouns like jobs. Grammatically incorrect. Incorrect Additional Information: Common Phrases with "At" Understanding common phrases can help solve fill-in-the-blanks questions. Here are a few phrases using "at" and their meanings: At least: As discussed, indicates a minimum. (e.g., You should study for at least two hours.) At most: As discussed, indicates a maximum. (e.g., I can spend at most fifty dollars.) At last: Finally, after delay. (e.g., At last, the train arrived.) At first: Initially, in the beginning. (e.g., At first, I found it difficult, but then it got easier.) At once: Immediately. (e.g., Please come here at once.) At random: Without a plan or pattern. (e.g., Numbers were chosen at random.) Choosing the correct phrase often depends on the surrounding words and the overall meaning of the sentence and passage.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 98archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number (3).

  1. A
    less
  2. B
    many
  3. C
    enough
  4. D
    much
Show answer
B. many

Understanding the Passage and Blank (3) The passage discusses tourism, highlighting its economic significance globally and its negative environmental impact. We are asked to fill in blank number (3) which is part of the sentence: "It is vital for the economies of (3)______ countries." This sentence emphasizes the positive economic contribution of tourism to different nations. Analyzing the Options for Blank (3) Let's look at the given options and consider how each one fits into the sentence "It is vital for the economies of ______ countries." less: The word 'less' is typically used with uncountable nouns (e.g., less water, less time) or to indicate a smaller quantity or degree. When used with countable nouns, 'fewer' is preferred. Even grammatically incorrect usage with 'countries', "less countries" doesn't convey the intended meaning that tourism is vital for numerous economies. many: The word 'many' is used with countable nouns (like 'countries') to indicate a large number. The phrase "many countries" fits grammatically and makes sense in the context, as tourism is indeed a significant economic driver for a large number of nations around the world. enough: The word 'enough' indicates sufficiency or adequacy. "Enough countries" doesn't fit the context of discussing how widespread the economic benefit of tourism is. It refers to a required quantity, not a general large number. much: The word 'much' is primarily used with uncountable nouns (e.g., much sugar, much information). It is not used with countable nouns like 'countries'. Grammatically, "much countries" is incorrect. Option Word Type/Usage Fits Blank (3)? Reasoning less Used with uncountable nouns; 'fewer' for countable. No Grammatically incorrect with 'countries' and doesn't fit context. many Used with countable nouns. Yes Grammatically correct with 'countries' and fits the context of widespread economic impact. enough Indicates sufficiency. No Doesn't fit the context of describing the number of countries benefiting from tourism. much Used with uncountable nouns. No Grammatically incorrect with 'countries'. Based on the analysis of grammar and context, the most appropriate word to fill blank (3) is "many". Tourism is vital for the economies of a large number of countries. Completing the Passage (with Blank 3 filled) Here is the passage with blank (3) filled: Tourism is one (1)______ the biggest businesses in the world, generating (2)______ 200 million jobs. It is vital for the economies of many countries. The downside is that tourism is a major (4)______ of climate change through the carbon (5)______ it causes. Revision Table: Blank Filling Exercise Blank Number Sentence Context Correct Word Reason (3) It is vital for the economies of ______ countries. many 'Many' is used with countable nouns like 'countries' to indicate a large number, fitting the context of tourism's broad economic importance. Additional Information: Countable vs. Uncountable Nouns Understanding the difference between countable and uncountable nouns is crucial for choosing the correct quantifiers like 'many' and 'much'. Countable Nouns: These are nouns that can be counted as individual units. They have singular and plural forms (e.g., country/countries, book/books, idea/ideas). We use quantifiers like 'many', 'few', 'a few', 'several' with countable nouns. Uncountable Nouns: These are nouns that cannot be counted as individual units; they are treated as a mass or concept. They typically do not have a plural form (e.g., water, information, sugar, happiness). We use quantifiers like 'much', 'little', 'a little', 'a great deal of' with uncountable nouns. In the given sentence, 'countries' is a countable noun because you can count individual countries (\(1\) country, \(2\) countries, \(10\) countries, etc.). Therefore, 'many' is the appropriate quantifier to indicate a large number of countries.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 99archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number (4).

  1. A
    revolver
  2. B
    contributor
  3. C
    contractor
  4. D
    quantifier
Show answer
B. contributor

Understanding the Passage and Blank (4) The passage discusses the tourism industry, highlighting both its economic benefits (generating jobs) and its negative environmental impact. It states that tourism is a major cause of climate change. Blank (4) is placed in the sentence: "The downside is that tourism is a major (4)______ of climate change through the carbon (5)______ it causes." We need a word that describes the role tourism plays in causing climate change. Analyzing the Options for Blank (4) Let's examine the given options to find the most appropriate word to fill blank (4): revolver: This word refers to a type of firearm or something that revolves or rotates. It does not fit the context of tourism causing climate change. contributor: A contributor is someone or something that helps to cause or bring about something, especially something negative. In this context, tourism helps to cause climate change, making 'contributor' a fitting word. contractor: A contractor is a person or company that performs work for a client under contract. This term is related to business and construction, not directly to causing climate change in this context. quantifier: A quantifier is a word or phrase (like 'many', 'few', 'much') used to express quantity. This is a grammatical term and has no relevance to how tourism impacts climate change. Selecting the Most Appropriate Option Based on the analysis, the word that best fits the meaning of the sentence is 'contributor'. Tourism is presented as something that adds to or contributes to the problem of climate change. The sentence becomes: "The downside is that tourism is a major contributor of climate change through the carbon it causes." This makes logical sense within the passage. Explanation of Why Other Options Are Incorrect 'revolver' is incorrect because its meaning is unrelated to the environmental impact discussed. 'contractor' is incorrect as it refers to a business role, not a factor causing environmental damage. 'quantifier' is incorrect because it is a linguistic term used to express amount, not a term describing something that causes climate change. Therefore, 'contributor' is the only option that correctly describes the relationship between tourism and climate change as presented in the passage. Revision Table: Key Terms Review Term Meaning in Context Relevance to Passage Tourism Business of providing travel and accommodation for tourists. Subject of the passage, discussed for its economic and environmental impact. Climate Change Long-term shift in temperatures and weather patterns. Negative consequence discussed as being caused by tourism. Contributor Something that helps cause something else. Describes tourism's role in causing climate change. Additional Information: Tourism and Environmental Impact Tourism is a large global industry with significant economic benefits for many countries, creating jobs and revenue. However, its growth also leads to various environmental challenges. These impacts include: Increased carbon emissions from transportation (flights, cars, etc.). Increased energy and water consumption in hotels and tourist facilities. Waste generation and pollution (plastic waste, sewage). Damage to ecosystems (coral reefs, wildlife habitats) through overcrowding and activities. Contribution to climate change through greenhouse gas emissions. Sustainable tourism practices aim to minimize these negative impacts while maximizing the benefits, ensuring the industry can continue in the long term without causing irreparable harm to the environment or local communities.

Paper & answer key PDF
Question 100archived

Select the most appropriate option to fill in blank number (5).

  1. A
    omissions
  2. B
    variations
  3. C
    emissions
  4. D
    options
Show answer
C. emissions

Analyzing Carbon Emissions from Tourism This question requires understanding the environmental impact of tourism, particularly concerning climate change. The passage highlights that while tourism is a major global business, it contributes to climate change. We need to find the correct word to fill in blank number (5) in the sentence: "...tourism is a major ______ of climate change through the carbon ______ it causes." The focus here is on the specific type of environmental impact related to 'carbon'. Understanding the Context for Blank (5) The sentence structure points towards identifying the consequence or byproduct of tourism that affects climate change. Specifically, it mentions "carbon ______ it causes". This phrase refers to the release of carbon-based gases, which are known contributors to the greenhouse effect and global warming. Evaluating the Options for Blank (5) Let's examine each option provided for blank (5): omissions: This word refers to things that have been left out or excluded. It does not relate to the release of gases or environmental pollution. Therefore, 'omissions' is not suitable here. variations: This term means changes or differences in something. While climate itself experiences variations, the carbon aspect caused by tourism isn't described as a variation in this context. So, 'variations' is incorrect. emissions: This word specifically refers to the production and discharge of gases or substances, particularly greenhouse gases like carbon dioxide, into the atmosphere. This aligns perfectly with the concept of the 'carbon' impact of tourism on climate change. For example, the carbon footprint of travel involves carbon emissions. options: This means choices or alternatives. It has no relevance to the environmental impact described in the sentence. Therefore, 'options' is incorrect. Conclusion on Carbon Impact Based on the analysis, the word 'emissions' accurately describes the release of carbon gases resulting from tourism activities, which contributes significantly to climate change. The phrase "carbon emissions" is a standard term used in discussions about environmental pollution and global warming.

Paper & answer key PDF